Electrical Sector Solutions
Volume 11:
Vehicle and
Commercial
Controls
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Control
Tab 1—Electronic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-1
Tab 2—Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-1
Tab 3—Special Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-1
Tab 4—Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-1
Tab 5—Dimmers and Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-1
Tab 6—Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-1
Tab 7—Definitions and Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T7-1
11
Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings
Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
Terms and Conditions
All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in the Eaton Corporation Price and Availability Digest (PAD).
All orders accepted by Eaton’s electrical sector are subject to the general terms and
conditions as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.
Technical and Descriptive Publications
This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton
Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our Web site at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21
Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for
atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these
products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S.
Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s electrical sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.
Copyright ©2012, Eaton Corporation, All Rights Reserved.
Introduction
Eaton Corporation is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,
control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
●
Reliability—maintain the
appropriate level of power
continuity without
disruption or unexpected
downtime
●
Efficiency—minimize
energy usage, operating
costs, equipment footprint
and environmental impact
●
Safety—identify and
mitigate electrical hazards
to protect what you value
most
Using the Eaton Catalog Library
As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Volume 1—Residential
and Light Commercial
(CA08100002E)
Volume 2—Commercial
Distribution (CA08100003E)
Volume 3—Power
Distribution and Control
Assemblies (CA08100004E)
Volume 4—Circuit
Protection (CA08100005E)
Volume 5—Motor Control
and Protection
(CA08100006E)
Volume 6—Solid-State
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)
●
●
●
●
●
Volume 7—Logic Control,
Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions
(CA08100008E)
Volume 8—Sensing
Solutions (CA08100010E)
Volume 9—Original
Equipment Manufacturer
(CA08100011E)
Volume 10—Enclosed
Control (CA08100012E)
Volume 11—Vehicle and
Commercial Controls
(CA08100013E)
●
●
●
●
Volume 12—Aftermarket,
Renewal Parts and Life
Extension Solutions
(CA08105001E)
Volume 13—Counters,
Timers and Tachometers
(CA08100015E)—Available
in electronic format only
Volume 14—Fuses
(CA08100016E)—Available
in electronic format only
Volume 15—Solar Inverters
and Electrical Balance of
System (CA08100018E)
These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
●
The Consulting Application
Guide (CA08104001E)
●
The Eaton Power Quality
Product Guide (COR01FYA)
If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012
www.eaton.com
i
Introduction
Contact Us
If you need additional help, you can find contact information
under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.
Product Selection Guide
TAB 1—Electronic Products
Description
Page
E31 eSM
V11-T1-2
E30 eSM
V11-T1-5
E32 eSM
V11-T1-8
E33 eSM
V11-T1-12
eVu
V11-T1-15
TAB 2—Rockers
Description
Page
Introduction
V11-T2-2
NGR
V11-T2-8
SVR
V11-T2-32
Dual Motion Safety Switch
V11-T2-41
1500/2500
V11-T2-43
1600/2600
V11-T2-47
Rockette
V11-T2-54
8006/8007—EURO SR
V11-T2-62
8004/8005 Euro Full-Size
V11-T2-65
X Series
V11-T2-68
8064/8065 ESPORT
V11-T2-72
Accessories
V11-T2-76
Technical Data
V11-T2-78
Symbol Library
V11-T2-80
TAB 3—Special Devices
ii
Description
Page
High Capacity Switches
V11-T3-2
Panelboard Switches
V11-T3-3
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy
Duty—AC/DC Rated
V11-T3-5
Locking Rocker
V11-T3-9
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012
www.eaton.com
Introduction
TAB 4—Toggle Switches
Description
Page
Introduction
V11-T4-2
Military Purpose Toggles
V11-T4-3
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
V11-T4-9
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
V11-T4-11
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
V11-T4-20
X Series Toggles
V11-T4-24
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
V11-T4-27
Accessories
V11-T4-31
Technical Data
V11-T4-35
TAB 5—Dimmers and Wipers
Description
Page
Paddle and Slide Controls
V11-T5-2
Rotary Wipers
V11-T5-4
TAB 6—Pushbuttons
Description
Page
AC Rated
V11-T6-2
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
V11-T6-8
TAB 7—Definitions and Index
Description
Page
Definitions
V11-T7-1
Index
V11-T7-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012
www.eaton.com
iii
Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Multiplexed Keypad
1.1
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rockers
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rockers
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplex Rocker
Switch Units
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
V11-T1-3
V11-T1-3
V11-T1-4
V11-T1-4
V11-T1-5
V11-T1-5
V11-T1-5
V11-T1-6
V11-T1-7
V11-T1-7
V11-T1-8
V11-T1-8
V11-T1-8
V11-T1-9
V11-T1-9
V11-T1-10
V11-T1-11
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
V11-T1-2
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
V11-T1-2
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
V11-T1-2
V11-T1-12
V11-T1-12
V11-T1-12
V11-T1-13
V11-T1-13
V11-T1-13
V11-T1-14
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T1-15
V11-T1-15
V11-T1-15
V11-T1-15
V11-T1-15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T1-1
1.1
1
Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Contents
Description
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
Page
V11-T1-3
V11-T1-3
V11-T1-4
V11-T1-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Application Description
Features and Benefits
Because your vehicle is
continuously exposed to
nature’s elements, we offer
the latest in Eaton’s
multiplexed line of switch
product, the E31 Keypad
eSM. Eaton’s E31 Keypad
eSM multiplex switch module
offers a flexible and sealed
solution for high-density
switch requirements in
severe environments. The
keypad can be configured
with any graphic/switch,
as well as with customerdefined illumination. For
customers requiring
additional switches,
expansion modules can
be used with no requirement
for additional CAN nodes. For
additional product flexibility
and differentiated operator
control the E31 Keypad eSM
is designed to communicate
with E32 rocker expansion
modules.
Great for specialty vehicle,
construction, and agricultural
equipment markets. The eSM
product is especially suitable
for severe environmental
applications and where there
is a desire to move to a
multiplexed solution to
simplify wiring and control
requirements. Typical
applications are:
Key Features
Target Market Segments:
●
Tractors
●
Wheel loaders
●
Refuse vehicles
●
Concrete mixers
●
Street sweepers
●
Mining equipment
●
Emergency vehicles
●
Transit buses
●
●
●
●
●
●
1
●
1
●
●
1
1
1
Fully compliant with
J1939/CAN 2.0b
messaging
IP68 degree of protection
from front and rear of
module
Rocker and keypad
expansion module
capability
Exceptional illumination
characteristics
●
LED backlighting of
icons
●
Four color daylightvisible indicators per
switch
●
Message-controlled
dimming and flash rates
Large switch surface area
and alignment ridges for
ease of gloved hand use
Exceptional tactile and
audible feedback of switch
actuation
Electrical/mechanical life to
over 1,000,000 cycles
9–32 Vdc operating voltage
Immunity per SAE
J1455/1113
●
Power disturbance
●
Radiated immunity
●
Radiated emissions
1
1
V11-T1-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Advantages
●
●
●
●
●
Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of eight
switches at one time as
opposed to individually
Reduced wire harness
complexity; uses one
harness to a controller,
reducing wiring,
connection point, and
controller requirements
Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
Increase in life-cycle
over traditional
electromechanical
switches
Front, rear, and panel
sealing for harsh
environments
Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
1.1
Catalog Number Selection
1
How To Order—E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Series
E31 = Keypad
Rows
2 = 2 rows
E31
2
4 M
Communication
M = Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b)
E = Expansion (LIN)
4
W 1
Indicators
4 = Red, amber, green, blue
G = Green
O = Orange
CV
1
1
Backlighting
W = White
G = Green
A = Amber
Indicators
1 = Indicators
2 = No indicators
Address
(Master) 2
1 = Address 1
2 = Address 2
FF = Expansion
Icons 1
CV = Circle
XX = No icon
Columns
4 = 4 columns
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
1
Master
1
E3124M4W1CV1
1
E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 2X4
Basic Part
Indicators Colors
Backlighting
Icon Graphic
Address
Catalog Number
E3124M
Red, amber, green, blue
White
Circle
1
E3124M4W1CV1
2
E3124M4W1CV2
1
E3124M4W1XX1
2
E3124M4W1XX2
1
E3124MGG1CV1
2
E3124MGG1CV2
None
1
E3124MGG1XX1
2
E3124MGG1XX2
Circle
1
E3124MOA1CV1
2
E3124MOA1CV2
1
E3124MOA1XX1
2
E3124MOA1XX2
None
Green
Orange
Green
Amber
Circle
None
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Expansion
E3124EGG1XXFF
1
E31 Keypad eSM Expansion Module, 2X4
Basic Part
Indicators Colors
Backlighting
Icon Graphic
Address
Catalog Number
E3124E
Red, amber, green, blue
White
Circle
FF
E3124E4W1CVFF
None
Green
Green
Circle
Orange
Amber
Circle
1
E3124E4W1XXFF
FF
None
None
1
1
E3124EGG1CVFF
1
E3124EGG1XXFF
FF
E3124EOA1CVFF
1
E3124EOA1XXFF
1
Notes
1 Contact Eaton sales for custom graphics.
2 For use of multiple masters on 1-system. (Address 3-8 available as special order.)
1
1
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T1-3
1.1
Technical Data and Specifications
Message Structure
The interconnection between
the master module and the
controller uses a minimum
four-wire harness with an
additional two pins associated
to expansion module
interconnection. Wire sizes
of 16–20 AWG can be
accommodated with the
Deutsch connector shown
in the mating connector
information.
Each CAN message contains
8 bytes of data. The first data
byte is used to define the
type of data carried in bytes
2 through 8. This difference
compared to common J1939
message structure allows a
single J1939 PGN address to
support all of the data needed
for switch status, LED status,
system status, wake ON
change, dimmer level, and all
other data used by a master
and expansion.
Master Wiring Harness
Expansion Wiring Harness
PIN
Function
PIN
1
Vbat
1
Vbat
2
Common
2
Common
1
3
CAN (+)
3
LIN
1
4
CAN (–)
4
5
Common
5
Common
LIN
6
Vbat
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
Dimensions
1
Deutsch DT Series connector
The Keypad eSM master
module is capable of
supporting Eaton’s E32 and
E33 product line of rocker
eSMs. The E32 and E33
product line is an abovepanel–style rocker switch
module that contains any
combination of rocker or
indicator functionality with
no additional CAN node
requirement to the system.
Similar to the keypad, the
rocker module offers icon
graphic illumination with up to
four center indicator bar LEDs
for status or mode. This
product is also fully functional
to support dimming and
flashing capabilities through
software command.
6-pin connector: DT06-6S
●
EP11 (Black–Master)
●
E008 (Gray–Expansion)
6-pin wedge lock: W6S
Female terminal:
0462-201-16141
(16-18-20 AWG)
Hole plug: 0413-217-1605
Crimper: HDT-48-00
Function
E
QU
1
30
I
(3.4 N-m)
LB
N-
1
E32 and E33 Rocker
Expansion Modules
XIMUM T
MA
OR
1
Mating Connector
Information
1
2
Master Module Wiring
Harness
3
1
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
6
5
4
1
Electronic Products
6
XXXX
XXXXXXXX
MADE IN MEXICO
LIN
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Mounting Dimensions
1
E31 Keypad Master or Expansion Module
Ø 50.8
[2.00]
1
Ø 5.54
[0.218]
2X
1
Backlit Daylight
White Graphics
Area—8X
15.5 [0.61]
18.5
[0.73]
Lighted
Indicators
Optional
As Required
15.5
[0.61]
1
1
34.70
[1.37]
66.2
[2.61]
69.40 [2.73]
1
16.0
[0.63]
1
1
97.2 [3.83]
1
15.2
[0.60]
17.1
[0.67]
1
17.7 [0.70]
1
1
32.2
[1.27] Max.
1
1
1
V11-T1-4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
#10-24 UNC Nut and
Lock Washer X2 (Included)
Maximum Torque:
30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm)
Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
1.2
Contents
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Description
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V11-T1-6
V11-T1-7
V11-T1-7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Tailored to meet the same
look and feel of Eaton’s NGR
product line, the E30 eSM
offers the added benefits of
multiplexed control and
system simplification. The
E30 eSM is a below-panel
styled multiplexed rocker
module capable of
communicating via SAE
J1939 CAN 2.0b. The
modules are set up in a
master-expansion
configuration capable of
supporting up to seven
1
Application Description
expansion modules per
master thus minimizing the
impact on a controller to a
single CAN node.
Additionally, up to eight
master modules per system
can be accommodated.
Communication with the
expansion modules is done
via a four-wire sub-bus.
Multiplexing of switches can
significantly reduce harness
costs and complexity as
well as improve installation
cycle time.
Master Expansion Modules
The E30 eSM is especially
suited for applications that
require both high current
independently wired
switches using Eaton NGR
switches as well as those
applications realizing the
benefits of multiplexing. The
E30 eSM is styled to match
the Eaton NGR switch for a
consistent look and feel to
your dash panel.
The E30 eSM also has the
capability of having a separate
input for key switch and
dimmer control functions to
increase the flexibility of the
product to interface seamlessly
to your vehicle.
Customization of the E30
eSM is done by creating an
application specific rocker
with icons representing the
function as well as by use
of colored LEDs to highlight
status. Two and three
position as well as momentary
or maintained circuits are
identified using a sub-actuator
to offer complete flexibility.
Target Market Segments:
Motor coach/bus
●
Specialty vehicle
●
Truck
●
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
Master
1
1
Expansion
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T1-5
1.2
Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
1
Technical Data and Specifications
1
E30 eSM Specifications
1
Description
Power supply
1
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
1
1
Switch life cycle
1
SAE J1455
Description
Specification
12 Vdc regulated power, 1.5A
Dust test (Non-operational)
SAE J726 Course
–40° to 85°C
Mechanical vibration
2gs from 10 to 2 kHz
–40° to 85°C
Mechanical shock
30g
Sealing
IP42
Handling drop
1m, 3-axis
Illumination
Dependent or search lighting, customer defined LED color
Load dump transient
Table 4A and 4B
Specification
250,000 cycles
Over-voltage
48 Vdc for 5 mins
Mechanical life
250,000 cycles
Under-voltage
4 Vdc for 5 mins
Radiated immunity
1
Radiated emissions
SAE J1113/41, Class 2
Dimming
0–10 Vdc Analog Input (0 = 0% and 10V = 100% brightness)
Connectors
Delphi Micro VHT 15499927
Delphi Micro VHT 13513469
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
–28 Vdc for 5 mins
Electrical life
1
1
Reverse voltage
SAE J1113/21, 100 v/m
Power Supply
Communication
Message Contents
A regulated 12 Vdc power
supply capable of providing
1.5A should be connected
to terminals 1, 5 and 6
of the six-pole connector
of the master module only.
All connected expansion
modules receive their
supply power from the
master module.
The communication to and
from the master module is
fully compliant to the SAE
J1939/CAN 2.0b protocol.
Status
Diagnostics
The LED indicators at the
back of the modules show
the status of the internal
diagnostics as follows:
Diagnostics
Byte
Status
Byte 1
Master module status
Byte 2
Expansion module 1 status
Byte 3
Expansion module 2 status
Byte 4
Expansion module 3 status
Transmission Repetition
Byte 5
Expansion module 4 status
Description
Specification
Byte 6
Expansion module 5 status
Transmission
repetition rate
100 ms
Byte 7
Expansion module 6 status
Byte 8
Expansion module 7 status
Data length
8 bytes
Data page
0
PDU format
PDU specific
Default priority
5
Parameter group
number
65440
The application-specific
J1939 message parameters
are as follows:
255
Within each status byte,
the bits are assigned to the
individual switches as follows:
The two status bit pairs
represent the switch state
in the following manner:
160
Bit
Switch
Bit
Switch
Bit 8&7
Not defined
00
Switch in DOWN position
Bit 5&6
Switch 1 status
01
Switch in MIDDLE position
Bit 3&4
Switch 2 status
10
Switch in UP position
Switch 3 status
11
Not defined
Label
Color
Meaning
1
J1939
ACTIVE
Red
CANbus
active
1
MODULE
ACTIVE
Amber
Sub bus
active
Bit 1&2
1
SWITCH
CHANGE
Green
Switch
change
where the switches are
numbered as shown
below.
where the position
assignment is as shown
below.
Switches
Position Assignment
1
Rocker
Position
C
B
A
1
1
Switch
1
1
Switch
2
Switch
3
1
1
A = DOWN
B = MIDDLE
C = UP
1
V11-T1-6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
1.2
Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Wiring
1
The master unit is connected using six unshielded wires. The
connection from the master to the first expansion module and
between any consecutive expansion modules is made using
four unshielded wires.
1
1
Expansion Module
Master Module
1
J1939 ACTIVE
MODULE ACTIVE
MODULE ACTIVE
SWITCH CHANGE
1
SWITCH CHANGE
1
1
Pin
4
3
2
1
Function
Vcc out
Ground
Sub bus +
Sub bus –
Pin
6
5
4
3
2
1
Function
Keyswitch
Dimmer
Ground
J1939 +
J1939 –
+12 Vdc
Master wiring:
●
Six unshielded wires
Pin
4
3
2
1
Function
Vcc out
Ground
Sub bus +
Sub bus –
Pin
4
3
2
1
1
Function
Vcc in
Ground
Sub bus +
Sub bus –
1
1
1
Expansion wiring:
Four unshielded wires
1
●
1
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mounting Dimensions
1
E30 eSM Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
If you want to mount the
modules in a panel, the
opening in the panel should
be rectangular, 2.835 in wide
and 1.732 in high (72.00 mm
wide and 44.00 mm high).
1
1
1.97
(50.0)
The panel thickness should
be between 0.039 and
0.157 in (1.00 and 4.00 mm).
1
1
2.99 (76.0)
Panel
Opening
1
0.47
(11.9)
0.10
(2.54)
1
1.734
(44.00)
1.85
(46.9)
1
1.22
(31.1)
1
1
2.835 (72.00)
1
2.82 (71.7)
1.70 (43.2)
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T1-7
1.3
1
Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Contents
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Description
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
Page
V11-T1-9
V11-T1-9
V11-T1-10
V11-T1-11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Multiplexed Master Module
using a LIN sub bus to
communicate with up to
seven expansion modules.
Offering a high level of
flexibility, the above-panel
electronic multiplex switch
module (E32 eSM) covers
your wide range of switch
and indicator applications
using standard or custom
graphics, as well as a full
range of circuits and
illumination options. The
above-panel E32 eSM has
top, center and bottom LED
lighting with software that
offers advanced circuit and
lighting flexibility, including
dimming and flashing options
via J1939 CANbus
communication. The indicator
bar can be lighted with up to
four separate colors to
indicate operational status,
vehicle mode and faults. All
standard combinations of
maintained and momentary
switch actions, matching
indicator caps and dummy
plugs, along with the
complementary styled SVR
electromechanical rocker
switch are available to
complete the offering.
Application Description
Compared with
electromechanical
switches, multiplexed
switch modules offer
several advantages.
●
●
●
●
Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of three
switches at one time
versus individually
Reduced wire harness
complexity, using one
harness to a controller to
accommodate up to 24
switches and a three-wire
interconnect between
expansion and master
modules
Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
Increase in switch lifecycle over traditional
electromechanical
switches (500k cycles)
Target Market Segments
This product is targeted at the
bus/coach, truck and
specialty vehicle markets.
The product is especially
suitable where a customer
has “gangs” of switches
mounted in a panel or
dashboard, and expansion
modules can be connected
easily to a master module.
●
●
●
●
●
●
On-road specialty vehicle
EMS vehicles
Street sweepers
Recreational vehicles
Motor coach/bus
Refuse vehicles
1
1
1
V11-T1-8
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Features and Benefits
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Fully compliant with J1939
CAN 2.0b messaging
LED lighting in top, center
and bottom positions
Late point definition of
circuit and rockers to
reduce inventory and
accommodate multiple
application requirements
9–16 Vdc operating voltage
16–32 Vdc operating
voltage
IP53 degree of protection
from the front
Easy address assignment
Immune to SAE J1455 and
J1113 power disturbances
Front panel removable for
ease of maintenance
Sleep mode available to
reduce current draw on the
battery
Wake on switch change
configurable
Decorative-style rocker
with matching indicator
option available
Colored rocker options
CAN controlled digital logic
output—500 mA
1.3
Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Selection
1
Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered.
Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
1
1
1
Status Bar
Icons
1
1
1
Modules
Voltage
Module
Icon Lighting
Status Bar Lighting
Catalog Number
9–16V
Master
Amber
Amber
E321AAAAAAAAA01
Green
Green
E321GGGGGGGGG01
White
Red, Amber, Green, Blue
E321W4WW4WW4W01
Amber
Amber
E322AAAAAAAAA01
Expansion
Indicator expansion
16–32V
Master
Expansion
Indicator expansion
Green
Green
E322GGGGGGGGG01
White
Red, Amber, Green, Blue
E322W4WW4WW4W01
Amber
Amber
E322AAAAAAAAAI7
Green
Green
E322GGGGGGGGGI7
White
Red, Amber, Green, Blue
E322W4WW4WW4WI7
Amber
Amber
E323AAAAAAAAA01
Green
Green
E323GGGGGGGGG01
White
Red, Amber, Green, Blue
E323W4WW4WW4W01
Amber
Amber
E324AAAAAAAAA01
Green
Green
E324GGGGGGGGG01
White
Red, Amber, Green, Blue
E324W4WW4WW4W01
Amber
Amber
E324AAAAAAAAAI7
Green
Green
E324GGGGGGGGGI7
White
Red, Amber, Green, Blue
E324W4WW4WW4WI7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Accessories
Rockers
1
Circuit Sub-Actuators
Color
Description
Catalog Number
Color
Circuit (Up-Middle-Down)
Black
Full-throw actuator
53-7350
Black
On
On
None
61-4043
Half-throw up actuator
53-7350-2
Red
Momentary
On
None
61-4043-2
Half-throw down actuator
53-7350-3
Light blue
On
On
On
61-4043-3
Full-throw actuator
53-7350-4
White
Momentary
On
Momentary
61-4043-4
Half-throw up actuator
53-7350-5
Yellow
Momentary
On
On
61-4043-5
Half-throw down actuator
53-7350-6
Gray
On
None
On
61-4043-6
Red
Black
Catalog Number
Indicator
53-7354
Pink
Momentary
None
On
61-4043-7
Dummy plug
53-7354-2
Maroon
None
On
On
61-4043-8
Panel plug
17-24241
Light purple
None
On
Momentary
61-4043-9
Orange
On
On
Momentary
61-4043-10
Green
On
None
Momentary
61-4043-11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T1-9
1.3
1
1
Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Wiring
Master Module Wire
Harness
The interconnection between
master module and controller
uses a simple four-wire
harness with addressing
specified by jumping
between pins 6 to 9. An
additional pin-out is provided
for a 500 mA output if
required.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Expansion Module Wire
Harness
Mating Connector Information
Mating Connector Information
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Function
VBAT
(clamp 30)
Ground
CAN high
CAN low
500 mA
output
Address 1
Address 2
Address 3
Address 4
No connect
No connect
No connect
Pin
1
2
3
Function
VBAT
(clamp 30)
Ground
LIN sub bus
Housing:
ETN 28-6982
●
Amp/Tyco #1394048-1
●
ETN 49-7867
●
Amp/Tyco #2-1355524-3
●
1
1
1
Master Address Assignment
Manufacturing Flexibility
The master switch module
address is set using jumpers
in the wire harness to
connect the following pins:
E32 eSM offers a
tremendous amount of
flexibility including options for
complete assemblies to be
provided as well as late-point
definable rocker and circuit.
Individual components can be
purchased independently and
assembled to create any
combination of circuits and
icons which is especially
suited for low volume/high
mix applications minimizing
inventory requirements.
Rockers and indicators can
also be laser-etched with
custom icons by Eaton or
other to accommodate
application specific
requirements. Contact your
Eaton representative to
discuss the Eaton solution
further.
Master Address Assignment
Pin
1
2
3
Function
VBAT
(clamp 30)
Ground
LIN sub bus
Pin
1
2
3
Function
VBAT
(clamp 30)
Ground
LIN sub bus
Terminal Pins
Connected
Address
6–7
A1
1
6–8
A2
1
6–9
A3
7–8
A4
1
7–9
A5
8–9
A6
1
6–7, 8–9
A7
6–8, 7–9
A8
V11-T1-10
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
Terminal:
ETN 28-6983
●
Amp/Tyco #1-1718346-1
Coding A
●
ETN 80-20608
●
Amp/Tyco #963715-1
●
1
1
The interconnection between
modules uses a costeffective three-wire harness.
This simplified wire harness
reduces cost, weight and
assembly labor for the enduser.
1
1
1
1
1
Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
1.3
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in mm
1
Mounting Instructions
The modules are easily
mounted with plastic retention
clips. Modules are mounted in
a single, space-saving cutout,
reducing assembly time and
accommodating up to three
switches in a compact
design.
1
The unit will accommodate
1.5 to 3 mm panel thickness.
1
1
1
1
Mounting Dimensions
61.4 ± 0.2
1
38.2
Max.
1
1
37.6 ± 0.3
41.0 ± 0.3
1
1
1
3.90 4X
1
61.60
1
45°
38.20
1
4X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T1-11
1.4
1
Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Contents
Description
E33 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
Page
V11-T1-13
V11-T1-13
V11-T1-13
V11-T1-14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Sealed Multiplexed Master
Module using a LIN sub bus
to communicate with up to
seven expansion modules.
Eaton is pleased to introduce
the newest line of multiplexed
electronic Switch Modules
(eSM), the E33 product line.
The E33 eSM offers an
increased level of flexibility
over previous modules
including:
1
●
1
●
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
●
Application Description
Compared with
electromechanical
switches, multiplexed
switch modules offer
several advantages.
●
●
Fully sealed to IP68 from
the front and rear
Locking rocker options
Palm guard option
The E33 eSM offers a
complete range of switch
circuits as well as indicator
options to meet all your
control requirements. Similar
to the E32 eSM product line,
the E33 eSM includes
individual icon lighting as well
as a multi-color center
indicator option allowing for
steady state, flashing and
dimming controlled via
messaging. Additional
flexibility is available by using
the Eaton IP68 sealed SVR
switch line for high-current,
hard-wired applications in
conjunction with our
multiplexed solution.
●
●
●
Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of three
switches at one time
versus individually
Reduced wire harness
complexity, using one
harness to a controller to
accommodate up to 24
switches and a three-wire
interconnect between
expansion and master
modules
Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
Increase in switch lifecycle over traditional
electromechanical
switches (500k cycles)
Reduced connections
resulting in less possible
failure points
Target Market Segments
This product is targeted at
harsh environment
applications where a
ruggedized product is needed
to meet demanding
requirements. Additionally,
applications where there is
concern over inadvertent
switch actuation driving the
need for guarding or locking
features are also well-suited.
Typical applications include:
●
●
●
●
●
Construction equipment
Agricultural equipment
Specialty vehicle
Material handling
Emergency vehicle
School and transit bus
Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.
V11-T1-12
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1
1
Features and Benefits
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
●
●
●
●
●
Fully compliant with J1939
CAN 2.0b messaging
IP68 degree of protection
front and rear
9–32 Vdc rated
Immune to SAE J1455 and
J1113 power disturbances
Top, bottom and full guard
option available
Locking rocker available
Front panel removable for
ease of maintenance
Sleep mode available to
reduce current draw on the
battery
Wake on switch change
configurable
LED lighting in top, centerindicator and bottom
position
Decorative style rocker
with matching indicator
option
Late point definition of
circuit and rockers to
reduce inventory
Diagnostics
Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
1.4
Product Selection
1
Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
1
Wiring
Master/Expansion Module
Wire Harness
Pin Numbers
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Master
VBATT
Common
CAN High
CAN Low
Common
LIN
Master = Black
Expansion = Gray
The interconnection between
master module and controller
uses a simple four-wire
harness. Addressing of the
master can be done by
software or via address claim
process. Interconnect wiring
between master-expansion
as well as expansionexpansion uses a three-wire
harness.
1
Mating Connector Information
●
Mating connector: Deutsch
plug DT06-6S
●
Wedge lock: W6S
●
Socket contact:
0462-201-16141
(1.0–0.5 mm2 [16–20 AWG]
●
Hole plug: 0413-217-1605
1
1
1
1
1
1
Expansion
VBATT
Common
LIN
LIN
Common
VBATT
1
1
1
Technical Data and Specifications
1
E33 eSM Specifications
1
Description
Specification
Operating temperature
–40° to 85°C
Storage temperature
–40° to 95°C
Operating voltage
9–32 Vdc
Environmental sealing
IP68
Mechanical shock
30g for 11 ms
Mechanical vibration
MIL-STD-202F/201A 2.0g random
1
1
1
1
Immunity to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances
1
Communication
Master
SAE J1939 CAN 2.0b
Expansion
LIN 2.0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T1-13
1.4
1
1
1
1
1
1
Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Standard Cut-Out
Serviceability
The modules are easily
mounted with plastic retention
clips. Modules are mounted in
a single, space-saving cutout
reducing assembly time and
accommodating up to three
switches in a compact design.
By modifying the standard
cut-out to include the optional
front panel removable slots
shown below, the modules
are easily serviceable from
the front of the panel without
further disassembly.
1
Standard Cut-Out
1
4X
0.13
(3.3)
1
1
1
1
Optional Panel Opening Features
2X 0.80
(20.4)
2.80 (71.1)
60º
4X
2X 1.83
(46.4)
2X 0.17
(4.3)
2X 0.50
(1.3)
1.45
(36.8)
Optional
Keying
Feature
Recommended Panel Opening
Panel Thickness: 0.04–0.16 (1.0–4.0)
4X 0.17
(4.3)
1
1
Due to the E33’s design
allowing for late-point
definition on assembly, both
the actuator and circuit profile
are serviceable as individual
components.
2X 1.70
(43.2)
Optional Front
Removal Slots 4X
E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
0.65 (16.4)
1
2.91 (74.0)
1
1
1.44 1.70
(36.5) (43.2)
1.87
(47.4)
1
1
1
1
1.75
(44.4)
1
1.12
(28.4) Max.
1
1
1.73 Depth with
(44.0) Mating
Connector
E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units (Palm Guard Version)
1
0.83 (21.1)
1
1
1.89
(48.1)
1
1
1
Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.
V11-T1-14
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
1.5
Electronic Products
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
Contents
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
1
Description
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Application Description
Features
With a focus on communications, convenience and
safety, Eaton Corporation is
pleased to introduce eVU.
Typical applications for
information display include:
Communication and
Networking
Designed for Easy
Installation
1
eVU displays can interface
with smart engines,
controllers and equipment
software via established
J1939 and J1708
communication protocols.
Some advancements in
technology create installation
obstacles. That isn’t the case
with eVU. The displays fit into
the same cutouts as standard
Eaton NGR rocker switches,
0.866 x 1.732 in (22.00 x
44.00 mm), making
installation easy.
The simplified architecture
not only saves dash space,
it also saves costs.
1
●
●
Rugged dashpanel displays
simplify the viewing,
selecting and inputting of
key equipment/trip data.
Working in sync with existing
controllers and networks, the
displays provide the driver
with valuable feedback on
vehicle status and
performance.
eVU displays offer a great
deal of flexibility which can
include:
●
Internal warning/
alert buzzer
●
Backlighted legend
displays
●
Sunlight readable
LCD characters
●
Internal power supply
●
Analog or discrete switch
inputs
●
Up to 2.5 digit character
display
●
8-segment bar graph
●
Individual LED control
So, what’s the e for?
Easy, electronic and
evolutionary. eVU fills
the gap (literally) between
on-board systems and
displays, ideal for applicationspecific functions.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Temperature
Pressure
Speed
Distance
Capacity
Transmission
Warnings/alarms
System information
Safety
eVU displays are easier
to access than typical
touch screens or soft-key
applications. Keeping the
dashboard displays within
the driver’s line of vision
helps keep the driver and
everyone else on the road
safe. Additionally, the eVU
displays are designed to
meet SAE-1455 specification.
What Do You Want to View?
There are many types of
eVU displays and they can
be customized with various
colors, resolutions and
character configurations.
Choose the functionality
you want with the flexibility
you need.
In addition, eVU displays
can receive input from
analog transducers and
sub-systems. Analog inputs
can be either 0–20 mA or
0–10V. Additional input
options exist for up to six
logic states.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
1
1
1
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Mounting Instructions
1
Product is designed to mount in panels between 1 to 4 mm
(0.039 to 0.157 in) thick.
1
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
1
26.0 [1.02]
2.7 [0.11]
44.04
[1.734]
50.0
[1.97]
22.02
[0.867]
50.0
[1.97]
1
1
1
1
Panel Opening
21.5 [0.85]
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
1
V11-T1-15
Rockers
NGR
2.1
Introduction
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
SVR
2.4
2.6
2.7
2.10
2.12
V11-T2-54
V11-T2-55
V11-T2-62
V11-T2-63
V11-T2-65
V11-T2-66
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-69
V11-T2-70
V11-T2-72
V11-T2-73
V11-T2-74
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-76
V11-T2-78
V11-T2-79
Symbol Library
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NGR Only Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
V11-T2-68
Technical Data
Rocker, Toggle and Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocker Switch Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14
V11-T2-48
Accessories
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13
V11-T2-47
8064/8065 ESPORT
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESPORT
V11-T2-44
X Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11
V11-T2-43
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EURO SR
V11-T2-42
8006/8007—EURO SR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9
V11-T2-41
Rockette
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8
V11-T2-34
1600/2600
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockette
V11-T2-32
1500/2500
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
Dual Motion Safety Switch
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5
V11-T2-8
V11-T2-10
SVR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
NGR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
V11-T2-3
V11-T2-80
V11-T2-85
V11-T2-95
V11-T2-1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
2
Rockers
Introduction
Rocker Switch Products
Contents
Description
2
Rocker Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NGR Rocker Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Motion Safety Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated . . . . . . . . . .
8006/8007—EURO SR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8004/8005—Euro Full Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X Series Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8064/8065—ESPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-3
V11-T2-8
V11-T2-32
V11-T2-41
V11-T2-43
V11-T2-47
V11-T2-54
V11-T2-62
V11-T2-65
V11-T2-68
V11-T2-72
V11-T2-76
V11-T2-78
V11-T2-80
Rockers
Introduction
2.1
Rocker Selection Guide
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
2
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated
2
NGR
SVR
2
2
2
2
2
2
Features
Ratings
15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac;
15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating)
12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc
2
Certifications
RoHS, UL® Approvable
RoHS, UL Approvable
2
Panel Opening
Rectangular
Octagonal
1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.30 mm)
1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)
1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
2
✔
✔
✔
✔
2
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
Catalog Number Selection
Page V11-T2-10
Page V11-T2-34
Technical Data
Page V11-T2-16
Page V11-T2-36
Circuit Diagrams
Page V11-T2-17
Page V11-T2-37
Dimensions
Page V11-T2-30
Page V11-T2-38
Icon/Legend Symbols Library
Page V11-T2-80
Page V11-T2-80
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
2
2
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
2
2
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
2
2
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
Poles
Single
Double
Four
2
2
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
2
2
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-3
2.1
2
2
Rockers
Introduction
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
Dual Motion Safety Switch
1500/2500
Ratings
10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac
Certifications
UL, CSA®, RoHS
UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS
Panel Opening
Octagonal
Rectangular
1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)
0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.20 mm)
N/A
1.075 in (27.30 ± 0.10 mm)
0.483 in (12.27 ± 0.07 mm)
0.876 in (22.25 ± 0.10 mm)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
Catalog Number Selection
Page V11-T2-42
Page V11-T2-44
Technical Data
—
Page V11-T2-46
Circuit Diagrams
—
Page V11-T2-78
Dimensions
Page V11-T2-42
Page V11-T2-46
Icon/Legend Symbols Library
—
Page V11-T2-53
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Features
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
Poles
Single
Double
Four
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
2
V11-T2-4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Introduction
2.1
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
2
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
1600/2600
2
Rockette
2
2
2
2
2
2
Features
Ratings
Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac
Up to 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Certifications
UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS
UL, CSA, RoHS
Panel Opening
Rectangular
Octagonal
1.075 in (27.30 ± 0.10 mm)
0.483 in (12.27 ± 0.07 mm)
0.876 in (22.25 ± 0.10 mm)
1.450 in (36.83 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm)
0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
2
2
2
2
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
2
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
2
2
2
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
2
2
Poles
Single
Double
Four
2
2
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
2
2
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
Catalog Number Selection
Page V11-T2-48
Page V11-T2-55
Technical Data
Page V11-T2-52
Page V11-T2-58
Circuit Diagrams
Page V11-T2-78
Page V11-T2-78
Dimensions
Page V11-T2-52
Page V11-T2-58
Icon/Legend Symbols Library
Page V11-T2-53
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-5
2.1
2
2
Rockers
Introduction
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
8006/8007
8004/8005
Ratings
10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc
10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc
Certifications
UL(CUR), RoHS
UL(CUR), RoHS
Panel Opening
Octagonal
Rectangular
1.450 in (36.85 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm)
0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
—
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
Catalog Number Selection
Page V11-T2-63
Page V11-T2-66
Technical Data
Page V11-T2-64
Page V11-T2-67
2
Circuit Diagrams
Page V11-T2-78
Page V11-T2-78
Dimensions
Page V11-T2-64
Page V11-T2-67
2
Icon/Legend Symbols Library
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Features
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
Poles
Single
Double
Four
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
2
V11-T2-6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Introduction
2.1
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
2
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
X Series
2
8064/8065
2
2
2
2
Features
Ratings
16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V
Recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc
10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc
Certifications
UL(CUR); RoHS, T85
UL(CUR); RoHS
2
2
Rectangular
Rectangular
2
1.46 in (37.00 ± 0.1 mm)
0.83 in (21.20 ± 0.1 mm)
0.83 in (21.20 ± 0.1 mm)
1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
2
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
2
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
Catalog Number Selection
Page V11-T2-69
Page V11-T2-73
Technical Data
Page V11-T2-70
Page V11-T2-74
Circuit Diagrams
Page V11-T2-70 (Light Diagrams)
Page V11-T2-78
Dimensions
Page V11-T2-71
Page V11-T2-75
Icon/Legend Symbols Library
Page V11-T2-70
Page V11-T2-74
Panel Opening
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
2
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
2
2
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
2
2
2
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
2
Poles
Single
Double
Four
2
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
2
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
125V LED
277V LED
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-7
2.2
2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Contents
NGR Rocker Switches
Description
2
Page
NGR Rocker Switches
Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocker Buttons/Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lens Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps .
NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-10
V11-T2-11
V11-T2-13
V11-T2-14
V11-T2-15
V11-T2-16
V11-T2-17
V11-T2-30
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Features
Eaton presents its NGR
Rocker Switches. This fieldproven line of full-sized rocker
switches, initially developed
for the heavy truck industry,
is now found in a variety of
vehicle-related applications.
Sealing
Standard switch provides
splash and dust resistance
to IP42. The sealed version is
sealed to IP67 when supplied
with panel seal.
●
Rocker
The standard actuator for the
NGR is a clean, Europeanstyled, two-face rocker made
of high-quality thermoplastic
material. The rocker is
replaceable and snaps on and
off the switch. Both the
rocker and the bezel are
supplied with an aesthetically
pleasing matte finish.
Different colors are also
available, but black is
standard. Rockers can be
ordered separately.
●
The NGR offers both
European styling and
ergonomic design while still
providing the solid durability
that you have come to expect
from Eaton switches.
Illuminated and nonilluminated versions with
either incandescent bulbs or
LEDs are available in either
dependent or independent
circuits and in a variety of
popular switching circuits.
Lighting
Each switch is capable of
accommodating two
incandescent light bulbs or
LEDs for lighting purposes.
A lamp or LED can be located
at either end of the switch
and oriented to be circuit
dependent or independent.
The incandescent bulbs are
front replaceable. Two lamp
or LED voltages, 14 Vdc and
28 Vdc, are standard. For
additional voltages or colors,
consult your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
●
The NGR also offers a variety
of rocker buttons and
indicators with laser-etched
or pad-printed icons,
insertable lenses and
adhesive-backed labels.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-8
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
Approvable under stringent
UL and CSA standards
For information, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative
RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Options
●
Circuits
●
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST
and 2PDT
●
Maintained and
momentary action
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Common lamp ground
jumper for dual lamp units
Multiple LEDs for daylight
readability
Additional colors of
rockers, mounting bezels
and lenses are available
Special circuits
Special ratings
Pad-printed legends on
lens, rocker and bezel
Special lamps and lamp
voltages
Dry circuit capabilities
Custom back-lit legends
available
Reversing jumpers
(internal)
●
●
●
●
Gang mounting system,
see Page V11-T2-77
Locking rocker with locking
feature in UP and/or
DOWN positions
Indicators with laseretched or insertable
lenses, or adhesive labels
IP67 rated sealed switch
Polarized lock-on
connectors, see
Page V11-T2-76
●
28-5637-2 for Packard
terminals
●
28-5940 for AMP
terminals
Panel plug 17-21543
Replacement bulb catalog
number
●
14V: 28-5901
●
28V: 28-5909
For more information on
additional options, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
2.2
Legends
Flexible Ordering System
Two legend areas are
provided on the ends of each
rocker of sufficient size to
accommodate two lines
consisting of four Helvetica
Narrow 12-point characters.
Legends may be nonilluminated or illuminated.
The NGR offers three styles
of illuminated legends.
You can order assembled
switches or the switch base
and actuator separately.
Use the final code in the
switch base catalog number,
Page V11-T2-10, to denote
assembly instructions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Single-piece back-lit—Backlighting is a high-quality
automotive/truck industry
technique. The legend can
appear daylight white or
dead-front when nonilluminated but, depending
on the back-lit color chosen,
will change color when
illuminated. Examples of
standard back-lit legends are
found on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Snap-in lenses—This rocker
will have either one or two
snap-in lenses in the legend
areas. Legends are typically
pad-printed on the lens in
black or white. Snap-in lenses
are available in six standard
colors and can be ordered
separately.
2
2
2
2
Label rocker—This rocker
has a one-piece adhesivebacked label inserted into
a recessed area on the
face of the button. Legends
can be done in several
colors and be illuminated or
non-illuminated. Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative for suggested
sources.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-9
2.2
2
Rocker and
Paddle Frame
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Full Palm Guard
Switch Base
Panel Seal and
Internal Seal
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
To order rocker and switch base assembled, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.
To order indicator caps, see Page V11-T2-15. For a complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Switch Base
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
Example:
Switch Series
(Unsealed)
NGR = Switch base
Circuit 1
1501 = Circuit
See Pages V11-T2-17
to V11-T2-29.
2
2
NGR
Frame Style
1 = Rocker and paddle
frame
2 = Palm guard (top)
3 = Palm guard (bottom)
4 = Full palm guard
(top/bottom)
S = Panel seal and
internal seal
G = Locking rocker 2
D = Locking rocker 3
F = Locking rocker 4
T = Internal seal
1501
Frame Color
B = Black
Switch
Contact Plating 5
N = Standard
T = High rated
G = Gold
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
B N
A
0
“A” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6
C = 28V LED/red 8
D = 28V LED/green 8
E = 28V LED/amber 8
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red 7
L = 28V LED/green 7
T = 28V LED/amber 7
W = 28V LED/white 7
X = 28V LED/blue 7
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue
N
“B” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6
C = 28V LED/red 8
D = 28V LED/green 8
E = 28V LED/amber 8
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red 7
L = 28V LED/green 7
T = 28V LED/amber 7
W = 28V LED/white 7
X = 28V LED/blue 7
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue
Notes
1 Circuits show lighting options available. See Pages V11-T2-17 to V11-T2-29.
2 Locks in DOWN position.
3 Locks in UP and DOWN positions.
4 Locks in UP position.
5 Switch contact construction plating—
N = Standard: Recommended for use on loads up to 12 amps at 14 Vdc.
T = High Rated: Recommended for use on loads greater than 12 amps at 14 Vdc.
G = Gold: Recommended for use on dry circuit/low level switching.
6 Replaceable.
7 Replaceable/wedge base LED.
8 PCB version LED.
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-10
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rocker
Assembled
N = No
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Two-Face
Rocker,
No Lens
Two-Face
Rocker,
Snap-In Lens
Rocker Buttons/Actuators
Decorative Decorative
Rocker,
Paddle,
Back-Lit
Back-Lit
Locking
Rocker
2
Label
Rocker
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Rocker Buttons/Actuators
2
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate button type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Rocker Button Type
1 = Two-face, no lens rocker
2 = Two-face, snap-in lens rocker
3 = Decorative rocker, back-lit
4 = Decorative paddle, back-lit
5 = Locking rocker
6 = Label rocker
Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” only
B = “B” only
C = “A” and “B”
D = No icon/lens/hole
3
C
AF
A 1
B
AE
C
4
A 3
Icon “A” Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “B” Code
AE = Lock
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “A” Orientation
A = Standard orientation
B = 90° clockwise
C = 180° clockwise
D = 270° clockwise
0 = No icon; no orientation
Icon “B” Orientation
A = Standard orientation
B = 90° clockwise
C = 180° clockwise
D = 270° clockwise
0 = No icon; no orientation
Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F = White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F = White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Indicator
Stripe Location
1 = “A” Position
2 = “B” Position
3 = “A” and “B” Positions
0 = No stripe
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Decorative rocker only.
2 Two-face rocker only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-11
2.2
2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Icon Location Examples
Icon Orientation Examples
Location A
Location C
Orientation A
Orientation C
Rocker with Icon in
“A” Position (Code A)
Rocker with Icon in
“C” Position (Code C)
Rocker with Standard
Orientation (Code A)
Rocker with Icon at
180° Clockwise (Code C)
Location B
Orientation B
Orientation D
Rocker with Icon in
“B” Position (Code B)
Rocker with Icon at
90° Clockwise (Code B)
Rocker with Icon at
270° Clockwise (Code D)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-12
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Translucent Lens
Transparent Lens
2.2
Lens Selection
2
For NGR Rocker Type “2” and Indicator Type “2CAP” only.
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Translucent Lenses 12
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Lens
Color
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White 4
Base
Catalog Number
28-5863-2
28-5863
28-5863-3
28-5863-9
28-5863-8
28-5863-2
AF
2
A
2
Orientation Style Code
A = Standard orientation
B = Rotated 90° clockwise
C = Inverted 180°
D = Rotated 270° clockwise
Icon Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library
on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
How To Order—Transparent Lenses 12
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Lens
Color
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear 4
Base
Catalog Number
28-5863-5
28-5863-4
28-5863-6
28-5863-10
28-5863-7
28-5863-5
AF
Icon Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library
on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.
A
2
2
2
Orientation Style Code
A = Standard orientation
B = Rotated 90° clockwise
C = Inverted 180°
D = Rotated 270° clockwise
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1
When ordering a lens with an icon for the code B (bottom) position, specify code C orientation.
2
Standard lens type.
3
Non-standard lens type.
4
Standard pad print for white and clear lens is black.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
2
V11-T2-13
2.2
2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps
Complete Indicator and
Indicator Cap Assembled
To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Complete Indicator
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
Example:
Indicator Type
2N = Two-face, snap-in lens
3N = Laser-etched
6N = Label
2N C
AA R
Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” icon only
B = “B” icon only
C = “A” and “B” icons
D = No icon/lens/hole
1
B
AB
Icon “A” Code
AA = Horn
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Lamp/LED Type and Color
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 28 Vdc incand./clear
0 = No lamp/LED
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
A 0
A
Icon “B” Code
AB = Battery
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Lamp/LED Type and Color
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 28 Vdc incand./clear
0 = No lamp/LED
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue
Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F = White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F = White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Decorative rocker only.
2 Two-face rocker only.
2
2
V11-T2-14
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Indicator Base
2.2
NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps
Indicator Cap
2
To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.
To order complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14.
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Indicator Base
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
NGRIND A
“A” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
X = 28V LED/blue
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue
Switch Series (Unsealed)
NGRIND = Indicator base
0
2
N
“B” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
X = 28V LED/blue
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue
2
Rocker
Assembled
2
N = No
2
2
2
2
2
2
How To Order—Indicator Cap
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Indicator Type
2CAP = Two-face,
snap-in lens
3CAP = Decorative/
laser-etched
6CAP = Label
2
2CAP
Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” icon only
B = “B” icon only
C = “A” and “B” icons
D = No icon/lens/hole
C
AB 1 B
Icon “A” Code
AB = Battery
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
AH
0
A
2
2
Icon “B” Code
AH = Fuel
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
E = Blue
A = Red
F = White
B = Green
G = Clear
C = Amber
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
E = Blue
B = Green
F = White
C = Amber
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1
Decorative rocker only.
2
Two-face rocker only.
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-15
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
NGR Rocker Switches
2
2
2
2
Description
Ratings
1
Specification
15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac
15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating)
Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards
Contact mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism
Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications
Contact material—
Standard construction
Movable—copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button
Stationary—silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button
Mechanical life
250,000 operations, minimum
2
Electrical life
200,000 operations, minimum
Terminal type
Standard 0.25 in (6.35 mm) spade, silver-plated copper alloy
2
Base material
High-grade thermoplastic molding material
Dielectric
1000V rms, minimum
2
Mounting means
Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
2
Mounting hole
Rectangular panel cutout 1.734 x 0.867 in (44 x 22 mm)
Panel thickness
0.040 to 0.156 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm) 2 3
2
2
2
2
IP rating
Standard IP42; sealed option IP67
Operating temperature
range
–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Notes
1 For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2 Best results obtained between 0.060 and 0.118 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm).
3 On sealed versions, recommended panel thickness between 0.079 and 0.118 in (2.0 and 3.0 mm).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-16
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Standard Circuit Diagrams
Single-Pole
2
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
1001
OFF
9
UP
Position
ON
2001
9
4
1 6
2B
7
8
9
10
1501
—
OFF
3
8
9
10
1502
—
OFF
NONE
—
5B
—
OFF
9
NONE
2B
1504
—
OFF
9
NONE
ON
5B
7
8
9
10
1505
—
OFF
2B
7
8
9
10
1506
—
OFF
NONE
2B
7
1507
—
NONE
9
10
9
—
1508
—
NONE
2B
10
9
—
8
—
2B-3
2
2
2
2
2
NONE
ON
—
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
OFF
NONE
ON
—
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
OFF
NONE
ON
2
—
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
OFF
NONE
ON
2
—
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
OFF
NONE
ON
—
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
OFF
NONE
ON
—
—
2B-3-9-1
5B-6
OFF
NONE
ON
—
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
2
2
2
10
5B
2
OFF
4
1 6
2B
7
2B-3-9
5B-6
8
3
5B
5B
2508
4
1 6
—
10
2B-3-9-10
ON
—
4
1 6
7
OFF
9
5B
2507
8
ON
8
3
5B
7
NONE
4
1 6
2B
4
1 6
2B
8
2506
10
9
5B
7
2B-3-10
ON
OFF
2
2
4
1 6
7
OFF
3
10
2B
8
2B
9
2505
3
—
5B
5B
8
2B-3-9
ON
2B-3
5B-6
4
1 6
7
4
1 6
3
10
3
—
5B
2B
9
2504
2B-3
ON
5B
8
4
1 6
3
NONE
—
10
3
—
—
4
1 6
7
4
ON
8
2B-3
10
1 6
5B
2503
8
NONE
4
1 6
9
—
5B
2B
10
3
7
3
9
2502
10
2B
8
4
1 6
5B
7
2B-3-10
ON
OFF
4
1 6
7
1503
3
10
2B
8
2B
9
2501
3
7
3
8
2B-3-9
ON
5B
7
4
1 6
2B
ON
UP
Position
4
1 6
2B
3
—
5B
7
3
2B-3
4
1 6
2B
NONE
CENTER
Position
10
3
—
5B
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
10
3
7
NONE
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
CENTER
Position
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-17
2.2
2
2
2
2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
1002
OFF
9
8
9
10
OFF
3
8
9
10
1522
OFF
8
9
10
1523
OFF
2
1524
2
2
OFF
8
9
10
OFF
MOM. ON
—
NONE
—
7
8
9
10
OFF
2
3
8
9
10
2523
—
NONE
8
9
10
2524
—
NONE
8
9
10
2525
8
—
5B
7
8
9
10
2526
5B
7
8
9
10
2528
5B
8
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-18
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
—
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
—
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
—
—
2B-3
5B-6
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
—
—
2B-3
5B-6
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
—
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
—
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
—
—
2B-3
5B-6
4
1 6
2B
7
2B-3
5B-6
4
1 6
2B
2B-3
—
4
1 6
2B
3
—
5B
5B
7
2B-3-10
MOM. ON
—
4
1 6
2B
2B-3-9
MOM. ON
5B
7
2B-3
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
4
1 6
2B
4
1 6
2B
7
NONE
5B
7
2B-3
MOM. ON
NONE
4
1 6
2B
3
—
5B
1528
2
NONE
2B-3-10
4
1 6
2B
10
3
—
5B
7
3
9
4
1 6
1526
2
—
10
2B
8
2522
8
9
2
MOM. ON
5B
7
3
—
5B
1525
2
NONE
OFF
4
1 6
2B
4
1 6
3
10
2B-3-9
10
7
2
2
OFF
9
2B
9
2521
8
3
8
3
—
5B
7
2
—
5B
7
4
1 6
2B
MOM. ON
UP
Position
4
1 6
2B
3
—
5B
7
3
2B-3
4
1 6
2B
NONE
CENTER
Position
10
3
—
5B
7
3
—
4
1 6
2B
2
2
2002
3
7
2
2
MOM. ON
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
9
—
5B
1521
2
NONE
UP
Position
4
1 6
2B
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
CENTER
Position
10
3
2
2
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
2
2
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
ON
ON
2003
2B-1
8
9
10
1541
ON
5B
8
9
10
1542
ON
8
9
10
1543
ON
NONE
2B-3-9
ON
—
NONE
2B
7
1544
—
ON
2B-1
—
2B-3
ON
NONE
ON
9
2544
7
2545
10
9
4
1 6
2B-1
5B
8
9
10
1546
ON
ON
7
8
9
10
1547
ON
—
NONE
2B
10
—
1548
9
7
8
9
10
2547
2B-3-9
NONE
ON
10
2548
9
2B-1
8
5B
8
—
ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
NONE
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
NONE
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
ON
NONE
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
ON
NONE
ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
2
ON
NONE
ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
NONE
ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
NONE
ON
2B-3
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
1 6
2B
7
2
2
10
3
5B
NONE
4
1 6
2B
4
1 6
5B
7
ON
ON
4
1 6
2B
8
2B
9
2546
3
2B-1-10
5B
7
3
8
4
1 6
5B
7
2B-3-10
ON
2
4
1 6
3
2B-1
5B
2B
NONE
2B-3-9
4
1 6
3
—
2B-3
5B-6
10
3
7
2B
8
3
1545
5B
7
NONE
—
4
1 6
2B
8
3
10
2B
5B
7
2B
9
2543
10
3
8
4
1 6
5B
7
2B-3
ON
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
9
9
2B
10
2B
8
3
9
2542
3
2B-1
5B
5B
8
2B-3-10
ON
ON
4
1 6
7
4
1 6
2B
10
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
9
2541
4
1 6
2B
—
5B
8
3
2B-1
7
3
ON
2B
7
4
1 6
2B
NONE
2B-3
2
NONE
4
1 6
2
ON
10
3
—
UP
Position
4
5B
7
CENTER
Position
10
3
8
2B
9
4
1 6
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
10
3
7
NONE
UP
Position
1
6
9
CENTER
Position
5B
1003
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
5B
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-19
2.2
2
2
2
2
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
1004
ON
9
2
2
8
9
10
ON
3
8
9
10
1562
ON
8
9
10
1563
ON
2
10
ON
8
9
10
ON
7
8
9
10
ON
3
2
8
9
10
1567
ON
3
2
2
8
9
10
1568
ON
3
7
2
OFF
2B-3-10
ON
—
OFF
—
OFF
8
9
10
2563
—
OFF
—
OFF
8
9
10
2564
—
OFF
8
9
10
2565
1 6
2B
8
—
8
9
10
2566
1 6
2B
8
9
10
2567
1 6
2B
8
9
10
2568
1 6
2B
OFF
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
OFF
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
OFF
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
ON
OFF
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
ON
OFF
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
OFF
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
OFF
ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
OFF
ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
4
5B
8
2
2
V11-T2-20
ON
4
5B
7
7
2B-3
5B-6
4
5B
7
2B-3
—
4
5B
7
3
2B-1
5B
5B
7
2B-3-9
ON
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
2B
2B-3-10
ON
5B
7
2B-3-9
ON
ON
4
1 6
2B
2B-3
ON
5B
7
2B-3
ON
OFF
4
1 6
2B
4
1 6
2B
10
3
2B-1-10
5B
7
2
9
2562
4
1 6
2B
8
3
2B-1
5B
7
2
—
5B
7
4
1 6
2B
ON
ON
4
1 6
2B
3
2B-1
5B
1566
2
OFF
2B-3-9
4
1 6
2B
10
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
9
2561
4
1 6
1565
2
2
9
1564
2
2
8
2B
8
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
—
5B
7
4
1 6
2B
ON
UP
Position
4
1 6
2B
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
2B-3
4
1 6
2B
OFF
CENTER
Position
10
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
—
4
1 6
2B
2
2004
3
7
2
ON
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
9
2B-1
5B
1561
2
OFF
UP
Position
4
1 6
2B
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
CENTER
Position
10
3
2
2
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
2
2
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
2
2
Rockers
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
1005
MOM. ON
9
UP
Position
MOM. ON
2005
2B-1
7
8
9
10
1581
MOM. ON
3
5B
8
9
10
1582
MOM. ON
8
9
10
1583
MOM. ON
OFF
2B-3-9
MOM. ON
—
OFF
1584
9
—
9
2B-3
OFF
MOM. ON
—
OFF
2584
5B
8
9
10
1586
MOM. ON
2585
OFF
MOM. ON
7
8
9
10
1587
MOM. ON
—
OFF
2B
9
10
2586
—
1588
7
8
9
10
2B-3-9
OFF
MOM. ON
10
8
9
2B-1
8
—
2B-3
2
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
2
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
5B
8
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
1 6
2B
7
MOM. ON
10
3
5B
5B
2588
4
1 6
OFF
4
1 6
2B
7
MOM. ON
9
5B
2587
8
MOM. ON
4
1 6
2B
3
2B-1-10
5B
7
2B
8
4
1 6
5B
7
2B-3-10
MOM. ON
2
4
1 6
3
2B-1
5B
2B-3
5B-6
10
2B-3-9
4
1 6
5B
8
3
—
—
10
9
2B-1
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
2B
10
7
5B
8
2B-3
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
4
1 6
2B
4
1 6
3
10
7
MOM. ON
2B
9
9
2B-1
1585
3
8
2583
8
2B
7
3
5B
7
5B
2
OFF
4
1 6
2B
10
3
10
4
1 6
2B
9
2582
7
MOM. ON
3
8
2B-3-10
MOM. ON
5B
7
2
MOM. ON
4
1 6
2B
8
2B
10
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
9
2581
4
1 6
2B
8
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
—
5B
2B
7
4
1 6
2B
MOM. ON
UP
Position
4
1 6
3
2B-1
7
3
OFF
2B-3
4
1 6
2B
—
CENTER
Position
10
3
5B
2B
9
4
1 6
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
10
3
7
CENTER
Position
OFF
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-21
2.2
2
2
2
2
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
1006
ON
9
2
2
8
9
10
ON
3
8
9
10
1602
ON
8
9
10
1603
ON
2
10
ON
8
9
10
ON
7
8
9
10
ON
3
2
8
9
10
1607
ON
3
2
2
8
9
10
1608
ON
3
7
2
OFF
2B-3-10
MOM. ON
—
OFF
—
OFF
8
9
10
2603
—
OFF
—
OFF
8
9
10
2604
—
OFF
8
9
10
2605
8
—
5B
7
8
9
10
2606
5B
7
8
9
10
2607
5B
7
8
9
10
2608
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
4
1 6
2B
5B
8
2
2
V11-T2-22
ON
4
1 6
2B
7
2B-3
5B-6
4
1 6
2B
2B-3
—
4
1 6
2B
3
2B-1
5B
5B
7
2B-3-9
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
2B
2B-3-10
MOM. ON
5B
7
2B-3-9
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
4
1 6
2B
2B-3
MOM. ON
5B
7
2B-3
MOM. ON
OFF
4
1 6
2B
4
1 6
2B
10
3
2B-1-10
5B
7
2
9
2602
4
1 6
2B
8
3
2B-1
5B
7
2
—
5B
7
4
1 6
2B
MOM. ON
ON
4
1 6
2B
3
2B-1
5B
1606
2
OFF
2B-3-9
4
1 6
2B
10
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
9
2601
4
1 6
1605
2
2
9
1604
2
2
8
2B
8
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
—
5B
7
4
1 6
2B
MOM. ON
UP
Position
4
1 6
2B
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
2B-3
4
1 6
2B
OFF
CENTER
Position
10
3
2B-1
5B
7
3
—
4
1 6
2B
2
2006
3
7
2
MOM. ON
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
9
2B-1
5B
1601
2
OFF
UP
Position
4
1 6
2B
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
CENTER
Position
10
3
2
2
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
2
2
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
2
2
Rockers
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
1007
ON
9
CENTER
Position
NONE
UP
Position
MOM ON
1 6
2007
9
2B-1
—
2B-3
2B
8
ON
9
NONE
MOM ON
1
9
5B
—
2B-3-9
1622
ON
NONE
MOM ON
1 6
3
5B
7
—
2B-3-10
2B
8
ON
9
NONE
MOM ON
2623
9
3
2B-1
5B
2B-3
NONE
MOM ON
9
2B
2B-1
5B
—
2B-3
2B
8
ON
9
NONE
MOM ON
1 6
2B
—
2B-3-9
1626
ON
NONE
MOM ON
3
1 6
2B
7
3
2B-1
—
2B-3-10
1627
ON
NONE
MOM ON
8
1
6
2B
3
4
2B-1-10
5B
7
—
2B-3-9
8
1628
9
NONE
MOM ON
2B
1 6
2B-1
—
ON
NONE
MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
NONE
MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
ON
NONE
MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
ON
NONE
MOM ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
2
ON
NONE
MOM ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
NONE
MOM ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
—
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
NONE
MOM ON
2B-3
7
2B
8
2B-1
5B-4
—
2B-3
5B-6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
5B
2
2
10
1 6
3
8
8
2628
4
5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
4
5B
9
10
3
1 6
2B
7
ON
—
10
9
3
7
5B
2627
9
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
2B
7
8
2
10
9
4
5B
8
2626
10
MOM ON
4
5B
2B
7
8
NONE
10
1 6
3
2B-1
9
8
9
4
5B
7
5B
2625
10
3
ON
4
7
1625
2
10
1 6
3
4
6
8
2624
10
1
2B-3
5B-6
4
5B
7
ON
3
1 6
2B
8
1624
9
—
—
10
4
6
1
7
7
8
10
2B
2B-1
5B-4
4
5B
7
1623
3
1 6
3
2B-1
MOM ON
10
9
4
2B
8
2622
10
9
5B
2
NONE
4
2B
7
8
1 6
2
ON
10
3
2B-1
2B
7
8
4
6
5B
2621
10
UP
Position
4
7
1621
3
1 6
3
5B
CENTER
Position
10
4
2B
7
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
10
3
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-23
2.2
2
2
2
2
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
3003
OFF
9
3
2
OFF
2
2
1 6
OFF
9
1 6
OFF
9
3
1 6
ON
2A-2B
ON
5B
2A-2B
OFF
9
3
1 6
ON
5B
2A-2B
OFF
9
3
1 6
ON
5B
2A-2B
OFF
9
3
1 6
ON
5B
2A-2B
OFF
9
3
1 6
ON
ON
5A 8
2A-2B
5A
8
9
10
3567
1 6
2A
2B
5A
8
9
10
3568
1 6
2A
2B
7
ON
ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
OFF
ON
ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-10
5B-6
OFF
ON
ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
OFF
ON
ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
OFF
ON
ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
OFF
ON
ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-10
5B-6
OFF
ON
ON
2A-1-10
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
OFF
ON
ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
4
5A
5B
8
2
2
V11-T2-24
OFF
4
5B
7
2B-3
2B-3
5B-6
4
5B
7
3
2A-1
1 6
2A
2B
4
2A
5B
10
2B-3-9
10
2B
9
3566
5A 8
3548
5A
8
3
2A-1-10
2A-2B
5A-5B
4
5B
7
2B-3-10
ON
1 6
2A
4
2A
7
10
2B
10
2B
9
3565
5A 8
3547
5A
8
3
2A-1
2A-1
5A-4
4
5B
7
2B-3-9
ON
1 6
2A
4
2A
7
10
2B
10
2B
9
3564
5A 8
3546
5A
8
3
2A-1
ON
4
5B
7
2B-3
ON
1 6
2A
4
2A
7
10
2B
10
2B
9
3563
5A 8
3545
5A
8
3
2A-1
ON
4
5B
7
2B-3
ON
1 6
2A
2B
4
2A
7
10
2B-3-10
10
2B
9
3562
5A 8
3544
2
ON
5A
8
3
2A-1
5B
7
7
2A-2B
OFF
4
5B
7
4
2A
2
ON
10
3
2
ON
1 6
2A
2B
5A 8
3543
2B
10
3
2A-1
5B
9
4
2A
7
8
2B-3-9
8
OFF
2
2
5A
2A-2B
5A
3561
10
3
2
ON
UP
Position
4
5B
7
3
2A-1
5B
2B
2
2B
4
9
2
2
1 6
2A
2B
3542
2
ON
1 6
2A
2B-3
CENTER
Position
10
3
2A-2B
10
3
2
3004
5A 8
9
2
ON
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
4
3541
2
ON
UP
Position
9
2A-1
5B
7
2
2
1 6
2A
7
Circuit with Rocker In …
CENTER
Position
10
2B
2
2
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
2
2
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
2
2
Rockers
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
5001
ON
9
UP
Position
OFF
1 6
5510
2B
9
4
2B-1
5B
8
9
10
5501
ON
3
1 6
2B
8
9
10
5502
ON
7
8
9
10
5503
ON
NONE
—
OFF
—
NONE
7
—
9
NONE
—
9
NONE
5514
8
9
10
5506
ON
NONE
7
8
9
10
5507
ON
—
NONE
2B
10
—
5508
9
7
8
9
10
5517
—
NONE
OFF
10
5518
9
2B-1
8
5B
8
—
—
—
—
ON
NONE
OFF
2B-1-10
5B-4
—
—
ON
NONE
OFF
2B-1
5B-4
—
—
ON
NONE
OFF
2B-1
5B-4
—
—
ON
NONE
OFF
2B-1-9
5B-4
—
—
ON
NONE
OFF
2B-1-10
5B-4
—
—
ON
NONE
OFF
2B-1-9-10
5B-4
—
—
ON
NONE
OFF
5B
8
2B-1
5B-4
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
1 6
2B
7
2B-1-9
5B-4
10
3
5B
OFF
4
1 6
2B
4
1 6
5B
7
ON
NONE
4
1 6
2B
8
2B
9
5516
3
2B-1-9-10
5B
7
3
8
4
1 6
5B
7
—
OFF
ON
2
2
10
—
OFF
—
4
1 6
3
2B-1-10
5B
2B
—
4
1 6
8
3
5B
5B
9
2B-1-9
—
10
5515
10
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
2B
4
7
5B
8
—
OFF
OFF
4
1 6
2B
7
ON
3
10
9
2B-1
5505
2B
9
5513
8
3
8
3
5B
7
5B
7
—
OFF
NONE
4
1 6
2B
10
2B
10
4
1 6
1 6
9
7
ON
3
8
5512
8
5504
5B
2B
7
—
OFF
ON
4
1 6
3
2B-1
5B
2B
10
4
1 6
3
9
5511
3
2B-1-10
5B
2B
—
5B
8
4
1 6
3
OFF
2B
7
3
2B-1-9
5B
2B
NONE
UP
Position
10
—
4
7
3
—
CENTER
Position
4
1 6
3
7
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
10
3
7
CENTER
Position
NONE
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-25
2.2
2
2
2
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
5002
MOM. ON
3
2
2
9
10
8
9
10
5522
8
9
10
5523
2
9
10
8
9
10
8
9
10
9
10
5528
2
7
OFF
—
NONE
OFF
—
NONE
OFF
1 6
5B
1 6
5B
5547
1 6
5B
7
2A-2B
2B-3
ON
ON
OFF
2A-1
2A-2B
2B-3
ON
ON
OFF
2A-1
2A-2B
2B-3-9
ON
ON
OFF
2A-1
2A-2B
2B-3-10
ON
ON
OFF
2A-1-10
2A-2B
2B-3-9
ON
ON
OFF
2A-1
2A-2B
2B-3
10
3
1 6
4
2A
2B
5B
5A 8
2
2
V11-T2-26
2A-1
5A 8
9
2
OFF
4
2A
7
ON
10
2B
2
ON
5A 8
5548
2
2B-3-10
4
2A
8
2A-2B
10
2B
—
2A-1
5A 8
5546
3
—
OFF
4
9
2B-1
ON
10
2B
—
ON
5A 8
2A
—
2B-3-9
4
5545
4
5B
5B
7
MOM. ON
1 6
1 6
2B
3
8
2B
NONE
2A-2B
10
2A
—
2A-1
5A 8
9
2B-1-10
5B
7
3
—
OFF
4
5544
4
1 6
5B
7
MOM. ON
2
OFF
3
5B
1 6
2B
9
2B-1-9
5526
2
NONE
ON
5A 8
2A
—
4
7
2B
—
ON
10
7
MOM. ON
1 6
5B
5543
3
7
3
OFF
2B-3
4
9
2B-1
5B
1 6
2B
4
1 6
2B
NONE
2A-2B
5A 8
2A
—
2A-1
10
7
MOM. ON
5525
2
2
8
5B
5542
3
5524
2
—
OFF
4
9
2B-1
5B
7
3
OFF
4
1 6
1 6
2B
7
MOM. ON
2B
NONE
ON
10
2A
—
ON
5A 8
5541
3
7
3
—
UP
Position
4
9
2B-1-10
5B
2B
OFF
4
1 6
5B
7
MOM. ON
3
NONE
3
7
2B
2B
9
2B-1-9
5B
1 6
2A
—
4
1 6
3
—
CENTER
Position
10
7
MOM. ON
2B
2
5003
3
8
3
2
OFF
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
9
2B-1
7
2
NONE
UP
Position
4
5B
5521
2
2
1 6
2B
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
CENTER
Position
10
9
2
2
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
2
2
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
2
2
Rockers
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
3001
ON
9
UP
Position
ON
3002
2B
9
4
1 6
5B-4-2B-1
5B
8
9
10
3501
ON
3
1 6
2B
8
9
10
3502
ON
1 6
9
10
3503
ON
1 6
5B-4-2B-3-9
ON
5B-4-2B-3-10
ON
3504
ON
9
2B
5B-4-2B-3
ON
5B-4-2B-1
3505
ON
9
9
10
3506
ON
6
2B-3
5B-6
ON
5B-4-2B-3
9
10
3507
ON
1 6
ON
ON
5B-4-2B-3
2B
ON
ON
5B-4-2B-3
ON
5B-4-2B-3-9
8
ON
9
ON
ON
ON
1 6
2B
9
10
1 6
2B
5B-4-2B-3
2B-3
5B-6
7
8
9
10
3527
1 6
2B
1–ON
2–ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
OFF
1–ON
2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
OFF
1–ON
2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
OFF
1–ON
2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
2
OFF
1–ON
2–ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
2
OFF
1–ON
2–ON
2
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
OFF
1–ON
2–ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
8
3528
OFF
1–ON
2–ON
2B
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
4
5B
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
10
1 6
2
2
4
5B
7
7
OFF
4
5B
9
5B-4-2B-1
8
5B
8
3
5B
2
4
7
4
2B-3
5B-6
10
1 6
3526
2B-3-9
5B-6
10
3
8
3
5B-4-2B-1
3508
5B
2B
2B-3
5B-6
2B-3
5B-4
4
3525
2B-3
5B-6
2B-1
5B-4
10
1 6
7
4
5B
7
8
3524
2B-3
5B-6
2–ON
4
5B
7
3
5B-4-2B-1
8
2B
1 6
2B
4
5B
7
3
10
9
5B-4-2B-1
8
1
9
3
5B
2B
8
4
7
3
7
2
1–ON
4
5B
3523
10
2B
1 6
3
5B
1 6
10
9
8
3
9
2B
10
2B
8
3522
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
5B
2
OFF
4
7
4
7
1 6
3
5B-4-2B-1
8
1 6
10
4
5B
7
3
9
3521
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
5B
8
3
5B-4-2B-1
8
2B
2B
7
4
5B
7
3
ON
UP
Position
4
1 6
3
5B-4-2B-1
5B
2B
ON
2B-3
5B-6
4
7
3
5B-4-2B-3
CENTER
Position
10
3
7
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
10
3
7
CENTER
Position
ON
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-27
2.2
2
2
2
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
3005
MOM. ON
9
2
9
10
2
7
8
9
10
7
8
9
10
3583
2B
9
10
3584
8
9
10
8
9
10
3586
8
9
10
3587
3
2
2
1 6
2B
9
10
3588
1 6
2B
7
2
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
1 6
2B
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3-10
5B-6
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3
5B-6
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3
5B-6
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3-9
5B-6
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3-10
5B-6
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-1-10
5B-6
2B-3-9
5B-6
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
8
9
10
4502
1 6
2B
8
9
10
4503
1 6
2B
8
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3
5B-6
8
9
10
4504
1 6
2B
8
9
10
4505
1 6
2B
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
4
5B
7
8
9
10
4506
1 6
2B
4
5B
7
8
9
10
4507
1 6
2B
4
5B
7
8
9
10
4508
1 6
2B
4
5B
8
2
2
V11-T2-28
2B-1
5B-4
4
5B
7
7
MOM. ON
4
5B
7
3
2B-1
5B-4
ON
4
5B
7
4
5B
NONE
4
5B
7
3
8
3
2B-3-9
5B-6
4
5B
7
2
2B-1
5B-6
3
5B
7
2
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
2B
10
3
5B
7
3
9
4501
4
1 6
2B
MOM. ON
8
3
5B
7
3
ON
UP
Position
4
5B
7
4
1 6
3585
2
2
8
2B
MOM. ON
1 6
2B
3
5B
7
3
2B-3
5B-6
4
1 6
3
2B-1
5B-6
CENTER
Position
10
3
5B
2B
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
3
2
9
3
5B
3582
2
4001
4
1 6
2B
2
MOM. ON
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
3
8
3
2
ON
UP
Position
4
5B
7
2
2
6
3581
2
2
1
2B
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
CENTER
Position
10
3
2
2
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
2
2
NGR Rocker Switches
Two-Pole
2
2
Rockers
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
5004
ON
3
1 6
2A
ON
UP
Position
OFF
5005
5B
2B
8
9
10
5561
3
1 6
2A
4
5A
8
7
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
ON
ON
OFF
5562
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
ON
OFF
3
1 6
2A
4
5A
7
8
9
10
5563
3
1 6
2A
4
5A
7
8
9
10
5564
3
1 6
2A
4
5A
7
8
9
10
5565
3
1 6
2A
4
5A
7
8
5566
3
1 6
2A
4
5A
7
7
8
9
10
5567
3
1 6
2A
4
5A
5582
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
ON
OFF
2B
7
8
9
10
5568
3
1 6
2A
2B
5B
8
5583
9
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
ON
ON
OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
ON
ON
OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
ON
OFF
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-10
5B-6
ON
ON
OFF
4
5A
2A-1-10
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
ON
OFF
8
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
5B
2B
7
8
9
10
5584
5B
7
8
9
10
5585
2
2–ON
1–ON
OFF
2
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
2–ON
1–ON
OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
2–ON
1–ON
OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
2
2–ON
1–ON
OFF
2
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
2–ON
1–ON
OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
2–ON
1–ON
OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
2
2–ON
1–ON
OFF
2
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
2–ON
1–ON
OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
ON
NONE
ON
4
1 6
2B
5B
7
8
5586
10
4
1 6
2B
5B
7
8
9
10
5587
4
1 6
2B
5B
7
8
9
10
5588
1
6
2B
4
5B
7
8
6001
9
2B-3
5B-6
4
1 6
2B
2B-3
5B-6
2B-3
5B-4
10
3
5B
2B-1
5B-4
4
1 6
9
2A-1
5A-4
OFF
10
7
6
7 3
4
1
5A
2A
5B
2B
10
8
2
1–ON
4
1 6
3
5B
2B
8
3
5B
2B
5B
2
2–ON
4
1 6
2B
10
9
10
3
5B
2B
9
5581
3
5B
2B
8
3
5B
2B
5B
9
2A-1
5A-4
UP
Position
4
7
3
5B
2B
1 6
2B
10
9
CENTER
Position
10
3
5B
2B
9
3
5A
DOWN
Position
Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
4
7
7
CENTER
Position
10
9
2
Circuit with Rocker In …
2A-2B-5A-5B- —
10-1-4-3
3-6-1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-29
2.2
2
2
NGR Rocker Switches
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Switch Base with Rocker Button
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)
2
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
2
2
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25) 0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
Decorative
Rocker
LEGEND
AREA “A”
2
2
LEGEND
AREA “B”
LEGEND
AREA “A”
SIL Rocker
(Snap-In Lens)
0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
2
2
Orientation
Examples of “Standard”
Orientation of Icons
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
2
2
Terminals
8 and 10
0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)
2
2
ROAD
LAMP
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
2
2
Terminals
7 and 9
Panel Opening
Panel Thickness:
0.039 to 0.157 in
(1.00 to 4.00) mm
(Best results
obtained between
0.059 and 0.118 in
[1.50 and 3.00 mm])
LEGEND
AREA “B”
2
Rockers
0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)
On Indicator “A”
0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)
2
1.024 ± .010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
On Indicator “B”
A
B
C
0.500 ± 0.010
(12.70 ± 0.25)
0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)
2
0.054 ± 0.005
(1.37 ± 0.13)
2
2
1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)
2
0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)
2
2
0.250 ± 0.005
(6.35 ± 0.13)
2
0.462 ± 0.005
(11.73 ± 0.13)
0.0305/0.032
(0.775/0.813)
0.523 ± 0.005
(13.28 ± 0.13)
0.144 ± 0.005
(3.66 ± 0.13)
2
7
5A 5B
6
5B
USA
9
0.667 ± 0.005
(16.94 ± 0.13)
2
V11-T2-30
2A 2B
10
2
1
2B
2A
9
3
1
2
8
7
5A
2
8
6
4
2
4
0.855 ± 0.010
(21.72 ± 0.25)
3
10
0.257 ± 0.005
(6.53 ± 0.13)
0.401 ± 0.005
(10.19 ± 0.13)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Locking Rocker
2
Sealed Rocker
0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
A
2
B
C
0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)
0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)
2
0.420 ± 0.005
(10.67 ± 0.13)
2
2
0.060 ± 0.010
(1.52 ± 0.25)
Panel Seal
1.450 ± 0.040
(36.83 ± 1.02)
1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)
2
0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)
B
C
A
2
2
0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)
0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)
2
2
0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)
0.320 ± 0.005 Max.
(8.13 ± 0.13 Max.)
0.245 ± 0.005
(6.22 ± 0.13)
2
LEGEND
AREA “B”
0.500 ± 0.005 Max.
(12.70 ± 0.13 Max.)
LEGEND
AREA “A”
LEGEND
AREA “B”
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.0 ± 0.25)
2
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
2
2
Indicator
2
Label Rocker
Surface Length Along Bottom
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
2
0.375 ± 0.010
(9.53 ± 0.25)
LEGEND
AREA “B”
0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
LEGEND
AREA “A”
1.128 ± 0.010
(28.65 ± 0.25)
0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
0.580 ± 0.008
(14.73 ± 0.020)
2
2
0.470 ± 0.010
(11.94 ± 0.25)
2
2
R0.060 ± 0.005
(R1.52 ± 0.13)
0.095 ± 0.005
(2.42 ± 0.13)
2
0.020 ± 0.005
(5.08 ± 0.13)
2
12° ± 1°
0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)
Rotated 12° CCW
Graphics Window
1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)
Note: Graphics window may be on both ends or either end of part.
Dimensions shown are typical.
0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)
2
2
2
2
0.0305/0.032
(0.775/0.813)
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-31
2.3
2
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Contents
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rocker
Description
2
Page
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Above Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Below Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
V11-T2-34
V11-T2-35
V11-T2-36
V11-T2-37
V11-T2-38
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
The Sealed Vehicle Rocker
(SVR) switch from Eaton’s
electrical business now offers
an above panel actuator style
in addition to the below panel
and paddle actuators.
Designed to meet the severe
environmental requirements
of the construction and
agricultural vehicle markets,
the SVR is sealed at the front
and back of the switch and
meets the rigorous sealing
requirements of IP68.
The small switch footprint
minimizes the space taken
on switch panels. SVR
switches are assembled into
panels by pressing the switch
through the top of the panel
and are held in place by
retention tabs molded into
the body of the switch;
mounting hardware or special
tools are not necessary.
Features
The SVR is offered in singleand two-pole switch circuits,
with two- and three-position
momentary and maintained
circuits available. Switch
and illumination circuits are
terminated with 0.11 in
(2.8 mm) tin-plated copper
alloy spade terminals. The
SVR connector can be
loaded with the appropriate
terminals and/or wire seals
to accomplish sealing at the
back end of the switch.
You can order assembled
switches or the switch base
and actuator separately.
Actuator Styles
●
Use the final code in the
switch base catalog number,
Pages V11-T2-34 and
V11-T2-35, to denote
assembly instructions.
Actuator
●
The SVR switch family
includes three styles of
actuators: above panel,
below panel and paddle.
Switch performance and
specifications are the same
for all actuator styles. Black is
standard, but other colors are
also available. Matte finish
is standard on all actuator
styles, matching the finish on
the bezels and all other visible
SVR switch features and
accessories.
●
Above panel rocker button
offers new styling and a
larger surface area. Eaton
can offer assistance with
unique designs of above
panel actuators for
applications where
differentiation is desired
Below panel rocker button
is the same two-faced
European styling that has
been offered for SVR since
its initial release. Indicator
style matches the below
panel rocker button style
Paddle actuator allows
toggle-type actuation of
the SVR switch
Standards and
Certifications
2
●
2
●
2
●
2
Approvable under stringent
UL and CSA standards
For information, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative
RoHS Compliant 1
2
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
2
2
V11-T2-32
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Illumination
Snap-in Lenses
Long life LEDs provide
backlighting illumination for
the SVR switch. Backlighting
can be either independent of
or dependent on the switch
circuits, or a combination of
both. Standard LED color is
amber, with red, green and
blue also available. LED
protection circuitry is
available to protect the LED
from overvoltage and reverse
voltage conditions.
●
Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
more specific information
about standard and custom
circuit options.
Backlighting
●
●
●
●
Each switch can
accommodate up to two
LEDs that can be
connected to be either
circuit dependent or
independent
Standard LED color is
amber, with red, green and
blue also available. Long
life (100,000 hours) LEDs
are standard
Standard LED voltages are
12 and 24 Vdc
The below panel rocker
button style includes a
single-piece back-lit
actuator with laser-etched
icons in either daylight
white or deadfront styles.
Without illumination, the
icon is either daylight
white or deadfront, but
will change to the color of
the chosen light source
when illuminated
Above and below panel
rocker buttons are available
with or without one or two
translucent lenses. Five
standard lens colors are
available: white, red,
green, blue and amber
Icons
●
Icon areas are provided
on each end of the rocker
button. Icons may be
illuminated or nonilluminated and are padprinted in a contrasting
color either directly on the
rocker button or the lens
Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting using four
flexible plastic retainers
integral with switch frame.
Circuits
The SVR switch is capable of
single- or two-pole
configurations with two- or
three-position maintained,
momentary or a combination
of actuations.
The addition of jumpers
between switch terminals
expands the circuit
possibilities.
Standard Circuit Options
ON–NONE–ON
●
ON–OFF–ON
●
ON*–OFF–ON*
●
ON*–OFF–ON
●
ON–ON–ON
●
ON*–NONE–ON
●
ON*–ON–ON*
●
ON*–ON–ON
●
Options
●
●
●
●
●
●
Note: * = Momentary. See
Electrical Circuit Diagrams on
Page V11-T2-37.
Sealing
SVR design includes a sealed
contact chamber with dust
and water resistance to IP68.
The harness connection can
also be sealed by using AMP
wire seals Catalog Number
828905-1 (14–16 gauge)
or 828904-1 (18–20 gauge)
to seal the wires to the
connector. For an application
where a connector cavity is
not being used, it can be
sealed with AMP sealing plug
Catalog Number 828922-1.
The above panel version
may also be sealed to the
panel using panel seal
Catalog Number 32-2245.
2.3
●
●
●
●
●
●
Additional colors of
actuators, mounting bezels
and lenses
Special circuits
Special ratings
Pad printing on the below
panel switch bezel
Low current capabilities
Custom back-lit icons
Gang-mount system
including end bezel Catalog
Number 17-22146 and
center bezel 17-22152
Palm Guard (below panel
switch only) at either or
both ends of the switch
frame
Indicators with insertable
lenses
Polarized lock-on
connector Catalog
Number 25-13936
Panel plug with connector
retention feature Catalog
Number 17-22145
Non-illuminated below
panel paddle actuator
Note: Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
additional information on options.
Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
more specific information
about SVR standard and
custom circuit options.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-33
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Above Panel Rocker Switch
2
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Above Panel Rocker Switch
2
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
2
2
S
AC
Switch Series
M
2X
D
G AT
R
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
M = Standard
Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits
2nd Digit (Illumination)
Single-Pole Illumination
A = None
C = Top/left (D)
A = ON–NONE–ON
D = Bottom/right (D)
1
C = ON–NONE–ON
E = Top/left (I)
D = ON–OFF–ON
F = Bottom/right (I)
1
E = ON–OFF–ON
G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
F = ON*–OFF–ON*
H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
G = ON*–OFF–ON* 1
J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
H = ON*–OFF–ON
K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
1
J = ON*–OFF–ON
Two-Pole Illumination
K = ON–ON–ON 2
R = None
L = ON–ON–ON 12
S = Top/left (D)
M = ON*–NONE–ON
T = Bottom/right (D)
P = ON*–NONE–ON 1
U = Top/left (I)
R = ON*–ON–ON* 2
V = Bottom/right (I)
S = ON*–ON–ON* 12
W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
T = ON*–ON–ON
Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
U = ON*–ON–ON 1
3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
1st Digit (Circuit)
KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent.
2
2
LED Wavelengths:
Red =
~630 Nm
Amber = ~592 Nm
Green = ~526 Nm
Blue = ~472 Nm
2
2
2
LED (Top/Left)
1st Digit
X = None
14V Standard
J = Red
K = Green
L = Amber (standard)
M = Blue
14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
1 = Red
2 = Green
3 = Amber (standard)
7 = Blue
28V Standard
E = Red
F = Green
G = Amber (standard)
H = Blue
28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
4 = Red
5 = Green
6 = Amber (standard)
8 = Blue
LED (Bottom/Right)
2nd Digit
X = None
Same codes available as 1st digit.
2
X
Frame
S = SVR
2
2
AC
C=
D=
E=
F=
Actuator Style
No lens
Top/left lens only
Bottom/right lens only
Top/left and
Bottom/right lenses
Lens Color (Top/Left)
X = None
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
A = Amber
W = White
Icon (Top/Left)
XX = None
AT = Work light
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.
Lens Color (Bottom/Right)
X = None
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
A = Amber
W = White
Icon (Bottom/Right)
XX = None
AC = Fast
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.
Notes
1 Gold plated.
2 Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38.
2
2
2
V11-T2-34
X
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
2.3
Below Panel Rocker Switch
2
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Below Panel Rocker Switch
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
S
AC
S
2X
Switch Series
S=
T=
B=
F=
S = SVR
Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits
2nd Digit (Illumination)
1st Digit (Circuit)
Single-Pole Illumination
A = None
C = Top/left (D)
A = ON–NONE–ON
D = Bottom/right (D)
C = ON–NONE–ON 1
E = Top/left (I)
D = ON–OFF–ON
F = Bottom/right (I)
E = ON–OFF–ON 1
G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
F = ON*–OFF–ON*
H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
G = ON*–OFF–ON* 1
J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
H = ON*–OFF–ON
K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
J = ON*–OFF–ON 1
Two-Pole Illumination
K = ON–ON–ON 2
R = None
L = ON–ON–ON 12
S = Top/left (D)
M = ON*–NONE–ON
T = Bottom/right (D)
P = ON*–NONE–ON 1
U = Top/left (I)
R = ON*–ON–ON* 2
V = Bottom/right (I)
S = ON*–ON–ON* 12
W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
T = ON*–ON–ON
Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
U = ON*–ON–ON 1
3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
1st and 2nd Digit Indicators
NE = 7–9 Illumination
NF = 8–10 Illumination
NK = Dual Illumination
N9 = Dual Illumination with 8–9 jumper
KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent.
3
G AT
R AC
Frame
Standard—Below panel
Palm Guard—Top/left
Palm Guard—Bottom/right
Palm Guard—Full
LED (Top/Left)
1st Digit
X = None
14V Standard
J = Red
K = Green
L = Amber (standard)
M = Blue
14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
1 = Red
2 = Green
3 = Amber (standard)
7 = Blue
28V Standard
E = Red
F = Green
G = Amber (standard)
H = Blue
28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
4 = Red
5 = Green
6 = Amber (standard)
8 = Blue
LED (Bottom/Right)
2nd Digit
X = None
Same codes available as 1st digit.
LED Wavelengths:
Red =
~630 Nm
Amber = ~592 Nm
Green = ~526 Nm
Blue = ~472 Nm
X X
Actuator Style
1 = No lens
2 = Top/left lens only
3 = Bottom/right lens only
4 = Top/left and bottom/right lenses
5 = Paddle—No lens
6 = Indicator—Top/left lens
7 = Indicator—Bottom/right lens
8 = Indicator—Top/left and Bottom/
right lens
9 = Indicator—No lens
A = Decorative rocker
2
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Lens Color (Top/Left)
X = None
B = Blue
R = Red
A = Amber
G = Green
W = White
Decorative Icon Color
1 = Daylight white
2 = Deadfront
2
2
2
2
Icon (Top/Left)
XX = None
AT = Work light
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.
2
2
2
Lens Color (Bottom/Right)
X = None
B = Blue
R = Red
A = Amber
G = Green
W = White
Decorative Icon Color
1 = Daylight white
2 = Deadfront
2
2
2
2
Icon (Bottom/Right)
XX = None
AC = Fast
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.
2
2
2
Notes
1
Gold plated.
2
Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
2
V11-T2-35
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rocker
2
2
Description
Specification
Ratings
12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc, can be approved under stringent UL and CSA standards
Electrical life
Standard plating
2
50,000 operations at 12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc. Life cycle testing conducted using both inductive and
resistive loads
Gold plating
250,000 (maintained circuits)/50,000 (momentary circuits) operations
at 10 mA at either 12 or 24 Vdc
2
Mechanical life
2
2
2
2
2
Maintained circuits
250,000 operations minimum
Momentary circuits
50,000 operations minimum
Circuits
Single- or two-pole, two- or three-position, with momentary and
maintained capabilities
Dielectric strength
1500 volts rms minimum
Operate force
1–3 lbs (4.4–13.2 Nm) depending on circuit configuration and actuator style
Temperature
Operating range
–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Storage range
–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Contact material
2
Movable
Stationary
Silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface
2
Gold-plated
Contacts are available for low level electrical loads
2
2
2
2
2
2
Copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface
Terminal type
Standard 0.11 in (2.8 mm) tin-plated copper alloy spade terminal
Mates to AMP Junior Power Timer Terminals 1
Catalog Number 927766-3 (14–16 gauge)
Catalog Number 927770-3 (18–20 gauge)
Plastic component UL ratings
Base material
UL 94 V-O
Frame material
UL 94 H-B
IP rating
IP68
Sub-actuator material
UL 94 V-O
Actuator material
UL 94 V-0 (above panel rocker button)
UL 94 H-B (below panel rocker button and paddle actuator)
Mounting hole
Standard panel cutout of 1.45 x 0.83 in (36.8 x 21.1 mm)
2
Panel thickness
0.04 to 0.16 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm)
Best results obtained between 0.06 and 0.12 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm)
2
Note
1 See also Sealing, Page V11-T2-33, for additional AMP components to seal the connector interface.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-36
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Circuit Diagrams
2
Switch Circuit Schematics
Code
A
C (Gold)
7
2
5
3
2–3
4
7
2
3
9
1
6
4
8
7
2
5
3
NONE
—
BOTTOM/
RIGHT
Actuated
ON
Code
A
C (Gold)
2–3
9
5
OFF
—
ON
D
E (Gold)
MOM. ON
OFF
2
3
9
1
6
4
5
2
5
—
F
G (Gold)
4
3
4
2
5
3
2–3
OFF
—
ON
H
J (Gold)
4
10
7
2
2–1
5
3
K
L (Gold)
4
10
7
2
Two-pole only
5
3
7
2
3
9
NONE
ON
M
P (Gold)
4
10
7
2
1
6
4
5
MOM. ON
2–3
—
2–1
5
10
8
3
R
S (Gold)
4
10
7
2
Two-pole only
5
3
7
2
3
9
MOM. ON
ON
ON
T
U (Gold)
4
9
7
2
5
2–3
6
4
10
2–1
5
8
BOTTOM/
RIGHT
Actuated
2
2
ON
NONE
ON
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
2
ON
OFF
ON
2
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
2
MOM. ON
OFF
ON
2
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
ON
ON
ON
2–3
5–6
5–4–2–3
5–4–2–1
MOM. ON
NONE
ON
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
2–3
5–6
5–4–2–3
5–4–2–1
2
MOM. ON
ON
ON
2
2–3
5–6
2–1
5–4
2–1
5–4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
6
2–1
CENTER
2
2
10
1
8
9
1
6
8
T
U (Gold)
9
1
6
8
R
S (Gold)
9
1
6
8
M
P (Gold)
9
1
6
8
K
L (Gold)
9
1
6
8
MOM. ON
9
10
7
2–1
10
8
1
6
10
7
2–1
MOM. ON
9
1
6
10
7
2
3
8
2–3
4
7
8
ON
TOP/
LEFT
Actuated
Two-Pole Schematic
(Shown in Top/left
Actuated Position)
2–1
10
1
6
8
H
J (Gold)
ON
CENTER
10
5
F
G (Gold)
9
1
6
8
D
E (Gold)
TOP/
LEFT
Actuated
Single-Pole Schematic
(Shown in Top/left
Actuated Position)
4
10
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-37
2.3
2
2
2
Dimensions
SinglePole
Code
Above Panel Rocker
TwoPole
Code
Schematic 1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
R
None
Above Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator
C
S
2
D
T
2
2
E
U
2
2
2
F
V
2
2
G
W
2
H
Y
J
3
2
K
4
2
2
2
Illumination
Code
9
2
2
2
2
2
8
10
7
+
0.945 ± 0.010
(24.00 ± 0.25)
0.400 ± 0.010
(10.16 ± 0.25)
9
10
+
7
+
9
8
10
7
+
9
8
10
+
7
+
9
3
7
+
1.870 ± 0.010
(47.50 ± 0.25)
0.300 ± 0.010
(7.62 ± 0.25)
3
8
ICON
AREA
T/L
ICON
AREA
B/R
0.052 ± 0.010
(1.32 ± 0.25)
Top/Left
Actuated
Center
Bottom/Right
Actuated
0.807 ± 0.010
(20.50 ± 0.25)
1.418 ± 0.010
(36.00 ± 0.25)
10
+
9
3
Panel Seal Gasket (Above Only)
Panel Opening (Above and Below)
8
10
+
7
+
9
3
1
8
10
+
7
+
9
8
10
+
Schematic 1
7
+
9
8
10
+
1.450
(36.80)
1.700 ± 0.010
(43.18 ± 0.25)
1.190
(30.20)
1.450 ± 0.010
(36.83 ± 0.25)
0.812 ± 0.010
(20.62 ± 0.25)
1.190 ± 0.010
(30.23 ± 0.25)
0.680
(17.30)
0.830
(21.10)
0.680 ± 0.010
(17.27 ± 0.25)
R0.060 ± 0.010
(R1.52 ± 0.25)
0.950 ± 0.010
(24.13 ± 0.25)
Note: Recommended panel thickness
0.039–0.157 in (1.00–4.00 mm).
Best results obtained between
0.059 and 0.118 in (1.50 and 3.00 mm).
Note
1
LED for terminals 7–9 is at
top/left side of switch.
LED for terminals 8–10 is at
bottom/right of switch.
2
V11-T2-38
1.299 ± 0.010
(33.00 ± 0.25)
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)
Catalog Number 32-2245
2
2
9
3
8
2
2
7
+
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)
2
2
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Illumination Schematics
2
2
Rockers
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
2.3
Below Panel Rocker
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Below Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator
0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)
0.390 ± 0.005
(9.90 ± 0.13)
2
ICON
AREA
T/L
0.270 ± 0.005
(6.90 ± 0.13)
0.446 ± 0.010
(11.40 ± 0.25)
2
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
2
ICON
AREA
B/R
2
Top/Left Actuated
Center
Bottom/Right
Actuated
2
2
2
0.100 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
2
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)
Panel Actuator (Below Panel Only)
2
1.610 ± 0.010
(40.89 ± 0.25)
2
Panel Guard (Below Panel Only)
2
0.940 ± 0.010
(23.88 ± 0.25)
0.551 ± 0.010
(14.00 ± 0.25)
0.102 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)
1.054 ± 0.010
(26.78 ± 0.25)
2
2
2
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)
2
2
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)
2
Indicator (Below Panel Only)
0.390 ± 0.005
(9.90 ± 0.13)
0.270 ± 0.005
(6.90 ± 0.13)
0.100 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)
2
2
ICON
AREA
T/L
ICON
AREA
B/R
2
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
2
2
0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)
2
2
2
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
2
2
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-39
2.3
2
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Accessories
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Gang Mount System
2
End Bezel Catalog Number 17-22146
Center Bezel Catalog Number 17-22152
2
0.820 ± 0.005
(20.88 ± 0.13)
2.020 ± 0.010
(51.37 ± 0.25)
1.020 ± 0.010
(25.96 ± 0.25)
2
2
1.770 ± 0.010
(44.88 ± 0.25)
2
1.530 ± 0.010
(38.90 ± 0.25)
2
1.450 ± 0.005
(36.80 ± 0.13)
2.050 ± 0.010
(52.00 ± 0.25)
2
2
2 End Bezels
2
1.976 ± 0.010
(50.20 ± 0.25)
2 End Bezels and 1 Center Bezel
0.640 ± 0.010
(16.36 ± 0.25)
3.000 ± 0.010
(76.20 ± 0.25)
0.150 ± 0.010
(3.75 ± 0.25)
2
1.070 ± 0.010
(27.10 ± 0.25)
2
2
Panel Opening
for 2-End Bezel
1.545 ± 0.010
(39.24 ± 0.25)
Panel Opening
for 2-End and 1
Center Bezel
1.545 ± 0.010
(39.24 ± 0.25)
0.540 ± 0.010
(13.64 ± 0.25)
2
2
2
2
1.000 ± 0.010
(25.51 ± 0.25)
2-End Bezel
2 Ends and 1 Center Bezel
Panel Plug
Connector
Catalog Number 17-22145
Catalog Number 25-13936
2
2
AMP Terminal Catalog Numbers:
927766-3 (14–16 gauge)
927770-3 (18–20 gauge)
AMP Wire Seal Catalog Numbers:
828905-1 (14–16 gauge)
828904-1 (18–20 gauge)
AMP Sealing Plug Catalog Number:
828922-1
0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)
2
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
2
2
0.660 ± 0.010
(16.80 ± 0.25)
1.310 ± 0.010
(33.40 ± 0.25)
0.100 ± 0.010
(2.55 ± 0.25)
1.240 ± 0.010
(31.50 ± 0.25)
2
0.580 ± 0.010
(14.75 ± 0.25)
2
2
1.730 ± 0.010
(43.95 ± 0.25)
2
0.330 ± 0.010
(8.40 ± 0.25)
2
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.56 ± 0.25)
2
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.57 ± 0.25)
2
V11-T2-40
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
1.020 ± 0.010
(26.00 ± 0.25)
Rockers
Dual Motion Safety Switches
2.4
Contents
Dual Motion Safety Switch
Description
Dual Motion Safety Switches
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
2
V11-T2-42
V11-T2-42
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Application Description
Eaton's Vehicle Control
business offers these
new dual motion safety
switches to prevent
accidental actuation and
protect operator personnel
and equipment.
●
●
●
●
●
These rockers are available in
two standard circuit options:
OFF (locked)—None—ON and
ON (locked)—None—ON. The
locked safety feature requires
two motions from the
operator to place the actuator
in the unlocked position. In
the locked position, the
operator must apply pressure
on the actuator forward and
an additional force in an
upward motion for the switch
to be moved to the unlocked
position. Once in the
unlocked position, the
switch can easily be moved
back into the locked position.
Farming equipment
Fire trucks and safety
vehicles
Lawn and garden
equipment
Large transportation buses
Industrial and commercial
equipment
Features and Benefits
Dual motion safety switches
are recommended up to
15A at 28 Vdc. An added
benefit is its IP54 seal level.
They can be used in tough
environments where there
may be exposure to small
dust particles or water
splashing against the
enclosure from any direction.
For available higher ratings
or additional customizable
circuits, please contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
Options
There are many options to
choose when building the
right switch for your
application. Termination
types to choose from include
screw type, solder lug and
0.250-inch spade terminals.
Actuators are available in four
standard colors with an
appealing matte finish.
Choose from black, red,
white or yellow. Eaton also
offers standard and
customizable legend pad
printing options on top of the
actuator. There is even an
option for arrows to be pad
printed on the sides of the
rocker to indicate the correct
forward motion.
2
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
UL/CSA Recognition at
15A, 125 Vac;
10A, 250 Vac;
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
RoHS Compliant 1
2
2
2
2
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
For added convenience,
the bezel is designed to
allow an easy snap-in switch
mount into various panel
thicknesses. The actuators
even have ergonomic
grooves to help provide the
operator a firm grip when
moving the actuator.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-41
2.4
2
Rockers
Dual Motion Safety Switches
Catalog Number Selection
8179K21Z T 51 AA A Y
2
2
2
Poles
and Throws
Circuit with Rocker In …
Position A Center Position Position B
OFF (lock)
None
ON
ON (lock)
None
ON
2PST
2PDT
Base
Part Number
Side Arrow
Pad Prints
X = None
Y = Both sides
8179K21Z
8179K22Z
2
2
Rocker Color
Y = Black
T = Red
M = White
E = Yellow
2
2
2
Available Switch Pad Prints
2
Prints 2
Termination Type
50 = Screw type
51 = Solder lug
52 = Quick connect
(0.250 in spade)
Top Pad Print 1
XX = None
AA = PTO
AB = Creeper engage
AC = Retarder
AD = Windrower ON/OFF
AE = Rotary lock pin cylinder
A=
B=
C=
D=
X=
Icon Orientation
Standard
90° clockwise
180° clockwise
270° counterclockwise
None
2
2
PTO
Creeper Engage
Retarder
Windrower
ON/OFF
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Dual Motion Safety Switch
2
0.957
(24.40)
2
0.648
(16.50)
0.102
(2.60)
2
PAD
PRINT
ICON
0.800 ± 0.010
(20.30 ± 0.25)
B
“A” ± 0.03
A
2
0.410 ± 0.010
(10.40 ± 0.25)
2
2
1.155
(29.30)
Pad Print Arrows on Side of Rocker
2
2
1.190 (30.20)
Recommended Panel Opening
Thickness 0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55)
Best Results Obtained from
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17)
Notes
1 Black pad print color for white and yellow rockers. White pad print color for red and black rockers.
2 Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more available pad print options.
V11-T2-42
1.450 (36.80)
0.680 (17.20)
0.830 (21.10)
0.276
(0.07)
2
2
1.548
(39.30)
Push rocker in direction of arrow
to actuate from “A” to “B” position.
“A” position = locked,
“B” position = unlocked.
0.669
(0.17)
6
2
1.844
(46.8)
2
2
2
3
0.170
(4.32)
1
2
0.250 (6.35)
(0.032 [0.80] Thick)
1
2
0.825
(20.90)
0.096 (2.40)
5
2
Dimensions
4
2
Rotary Lock
Pin Cylinder
3
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
1.427
(36.20)
Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
2.5
Contents
1500/2500 Series
Description
Page
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . .
Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T2-44
V11-T2-45
V11-T2-46
V11-T2-46
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Options
Eaton’s 1500/2500 series
rocker switch offers a
designer touch that will
enhance any product line.
High Inrush Option
Ideal applications include
appliances, electronic
instrumentation, data
processing, communications
and medical and office
equipment. Custom legends
are available on the switch
actuator and bezel.
The 1500H/2500H is
designed to handle high
inrush currents up to
100A peak inrush for
10 milliseconds.
This two-color rocker version
brightly indicates the ON
position. This version spares
the expense of more costly
illuminated switches and is
available with the high inrush
option.
2
Note: See Catalog Number
Selection for more detail.
2
International Approvals
●
●
Hi-Lite Rocker with
High Inrush Option
2
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
2
UL Recognized
CSA Certified
ENEC
RoHS Compliant 1
2
2
EN
EC
2
2
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-43
2.5
Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
2
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate
code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Midsize Non-Illuminated
Example:
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(4)A 250V
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(4)A 250V
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
2
2
2
Rating
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac,
10A 250 Vac,
10A 28Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC:
10(4)A 250V
2
2
2
1PDT
ON
OFF
ON
1504
6
1PDT
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
1506
1507
9
8
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
ON
MOM. ON
2500
2501
2505
2502
2503
10
11
12
13
15
2PDT
ON
OFF
ON
2504
14
2PDT
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
2506
2507
17
16
2PST
2PDT
Example:
2
2
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
1PDT
E
038
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON
1PST
1
Circuit
Number 3
1
3
4
5
7
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Note: B style terminal not offered
for 1506 Series.
Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular Legends
table on Page V11-T2-53.
How To Order—Midsize Illuminated
2
2
2
DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number 2
1500
OFF
1501
OFF
1505
MOM. OFF
ON
1502
MOM. ON
1503
Poles
and
Throw
Rating
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
1500
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
2500
1PST
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number
OFF
1500
OFF
1501
2PST
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
Poles
and
Throw
2500
2501
G
2 2
E
725
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Circuit
Number
3
18
21
28
30
Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)
Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 4
5 = 12V filament 4
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Notes
1 1500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2 #1500—#1507 switches are supplied in 1500 type base. #2500—#2507 switches are supplied in 2500 type base.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.
V11-T2-44
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Legend Type
(Optional)
725 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
2.5
Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush Option
1500H
Example:
Poles
and
Throw
Rating
UL/CSA:15A 125 Vac,
10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(4)A 250V
UL/CSA: 22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT, 1 hp
125-250Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
1PST
1PST
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Pos.
Position
ON
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
NONE
DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number
OFF
OFF
NONE
1 2
1500 _
1501 _
OFF
1500H
E
2
038
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.
Circuit
Number
3
1
3
2
4
1
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Hi-Lite Color
1 = Black
5 = Gray
2 = White
6 = Red
4 = Green
7 = Yellow
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs 4
Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
2
2
2
Example:
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Pos.
Position
1500H
DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number
1
2 E
2
038
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.
Circuit
Number
3
1PST
ON
NONE
OFF
1500H
1
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
2500H
10
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
Example:
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Pos.
Position
2500H
DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number
1PST
ON
NONE
OFF
1500H
18
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
2500H
28
2
2
2
725
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.
2
G
2 2
E
Circuit
Number
3
2
2
How To Order—High Inrush Illuminated
Rating
UL/CSA:
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
2
2
How To Order—High Inrush, Non-Illuminated
Rating
UL/CSA:
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT, 1 hp
125-250 Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
2
Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)
Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
4 = 6V filament 5
5 = 12V filament 5
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
Base and Bezel
Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Legend Type
(Optional)
725 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
2
2
2
2
2
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/
0.25 in quick
connect
2
Notes
1 1500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #2. 1500H Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2500H Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2 High inrush capabilities available only on basic catalog numbers beginning with 1500H.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4 Standard rating only.
5 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
V11-T2-45
2.5
Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Description
Specification
Description
Specification
2
Ratings
See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-44 and V11-T2-45.
Mechanical life
50,000 cycles minimum
Seal level
IP40
Insulation resistance
50M ohms minimum
Dielectric withstand
1000V rms minimum
2
Circuits
Standard
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, maintained and momentary
Terminal types
2
High inrush option
1PST, 2PST, maintained
Standard
6.3 mm Tabs/0.250 in Quick Connect
Hi-lite option
1PST, maintained
Optional
Solder lug
2
Contact mechanism
Standard
Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
Common (center)
2
High inrush option
Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break
End
Copper
Make—High inrush option
100A peak inrush at 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles minimum
Lamp
Brass
Break—High inrush option
16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles minimum
Mounting
See dimensions below
Contact material
Silver inlay over copper
32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)
2
Operating temperature
range
Contact resistance
10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc
2
Dimensions
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
2
2
Termination material
1500/1500H Type Base
0.287 (7.30)
Max.
Matte Finish Bezel
Matte Finish Rocker
(Non-Illuminated)
Translucent Rocker
(Illuminated)
1.248
(31.70)
Max.
2
0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)
Combination
Quick Connect/
Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.325 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.815 ± 0.02) Thick
0.595 (15.11)
Max.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50)
Nom.
0.380 ± 0.002.0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)
2
0.422 ± 0.003
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.756
(19.20)
Nom.
0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)
0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)
1.070
(27.18)
Max.
0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
0.483 ± 0.003
(12.27 ± 0.07)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)
0.351 ± 0.010/0.011
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
Panel Opening
Panel Thickness: 0.031–0.118 (0.75–3.00)
Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only
2500/2500H Type Base
0.287 (7.30)
Max.
2
2
Copper fine silver-plated
1.248
(31.70)
Max.
Matte Finish Bezel
Matte Finish Rocker
(Non-Illuminated)
Translucent Rocker
(Illuminated)
0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)
1.028 (26.11)
Max.
2
2
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50)
Nom.
2
0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)
0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
0.351 ± 0.010/0.011
0.756
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
(19.20)
Nom.
Code “B” Alternative
Solder Lug Only
2
2
Combination
Quick Connect/
Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.325 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.815 ± 0.02) Thick
0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05) 0.422 ± 0.003
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.982 ± 0.011
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70)
Nom.
1.070 (27.18)
Max.
0.876 ± 0.004
(22.25 ± 0.10)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)
1.026 ± 0.002
(26.05 ± 0.05)
0.327 (8.31)
Nom.
Panel Opening
Panel Thickness:
0.030–0.118 (0.75–3.00)
0.658 ± 0.004
(16.712 ± 0.14)
0.868 ± 0.002
(22.05 ± 0.05)
2
V11-T2-46
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70)
Nom.
0.474 ± 0.002
(12.05 ± 0.05)
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
2.6
Contents
1600/2600 Series
Description
Page
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Non-Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Splashguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Inrush Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T2-48
V11-T2-49
V11-T2-50
V11-T2-51
V11-T2-52
V11-T2-52
V11-T2-53
V11-T2-53
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Options
Eaton’s 1600/2600 series of
midsize snap-in rocker and
paddle switches have
worldwide approvals at up to
16A, 250 Vac. One switch
can be used for both
domestic and foreign
markets.
High Inrush Option
Ideal applications include
appliances, electronic
instrumentation, data
processing, communications,
medical equipment, office
equipment and many more.
A wide circuit variety is
offered in a choice of
standard and custom colors
for illuminated and nonilluminated versions. Custom
legends are available on the
switch lever and bezel. High
inrush and splashguard are
also available.
This version features a
uniquely designed seal that
resists moisture and water,
making it ideally suited for
marine, RV and food
processing applications.
The oversized nylon lever
with smooth, matte finish
features a convenient
thumb depression to
ensure effortless touch
control. Two-pole switches
feature both a thumb
depression and a convex
curve. See Page V11-T2-50.
The 1600H/2600H is
designed to handle high
inrush currents up to
100A peak inrush for
10 milliseconds.
2
Note: See Catalog Number
Selection for more detail.
2
International Approvals
●
●
Splashguard Option
2
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
2
UL Recognized
CSA Certified 1
ENEC
RoHS Compliant 2
2
2
EN
EC
2
2
Notes
1 Splashguard option is cRU marked only.
2 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-47
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Non-Illuminated Rocker
2
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add
the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Non-Illuminated Rocker
Example:
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rating
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
1600
M 2
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
ON
MOM. ON
Rocker
1600
1601
1605
1602
1603
Paddle 1
P1600
P1601
P1605
P1602
P1603
Circuit
Number
1
3
4
5
7
1PDT
ON
OFF
ON
1604
P1604
6
1PDT
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
1606
1607
P1606
P1607
9
8
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
ON
MOM. ON
2600
2601
2605
2602
2603
P2600
P2601
P2605
P2602
P2603
10
11
12
13
15
2PDT
ON
OFF
ON
2604
P2604
14
2PDT
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
2606
2607
P2606
P2607
17
16
2PST
2PDT
3
Finish
4
Blank = Standard
M = Matte
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Rocker/Paddle
Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Notes
1 Paddles are UL, CSA only.
2 1600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4 To order the standard, add a “dash” to the catalog number. Example: 1600–11E.
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-48
E
038
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Base Circuit Number
DOWN 2
Position
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Illuminated Rocker
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Illuminated Rocker
2
Example:
1621 X
W 5
3
E
038
2
X = Independent lamp
Rating
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
ON
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
1PDT
ON
OFF
ON
1624X
4
1PDT
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
1626X
1627X
4
2PST
ON
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
2600
2601
2605
28
30
31
—
Indicator
—
—
1609
32
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number
1600
OFF
1601
OFF
1620X
OFF
1621X
OFF
1625X
MOM. OFF
ON
1622X
MOM. ON
1623X
1PDT
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
—
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
2
Circuit
Number
18
21
20
4
3
Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)
Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
4
4
4
4
Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 5
5 = 12V filament 5
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 1600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2 #1600—#1609 switches are supplied in 1600 type base.
#1620—#1627 switches are supplied in 2600 type base. (Must have an “X” code.)
#2600—#2605 switches are supplied in 2600 type base.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4 All independent lamps for IP switches to be assembled from terminal positions #24 and #26.
5
6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-49
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Splashguard
2
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Splashguard 1
Example:
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
2
1PST
16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1PDT
10A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
10A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1PDT
2PST
2PDT
2PDT
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
NONE
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
DOWN
Position
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
B1600
1
Base
Circuit
Number
B1600
B1601
B1602
B1604
B1606
B1607
B2600
B2601
B2602
B2604
B2606
B2607
Circuit
Number 3
1
2
5
6
9
8
10
11
13
14
17
16
Base Color
1 = Black
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
4 = Green
5 = Gray
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Splashguard
Ø 0.560
(14.22) (2)
17°
1.800
(45.72)
1.000
(25.40)
2
0.474 ± 0.001
(12.05 ± 0.05)
2
2
Hole
Ø 0.106 nom.
(2.70)
0.868 ± 0.001
(22.05 ± 0.05)
Single-Pole
0.81 + 0.02/–0.01
(0.032) Thick
Two-Pole
1.026 ± 0.001
(26.05 ± 0.05)
0.424 + 0.003/–0.004
(10.75 + 0.11/–0.10)
0.758 ± 0.005
(19.26 ± 0.14)
1.070
(27.18)
0.888 ± 0.001
(22.05 ± 0.05)
2
2
Hole
Ø 0.106 nom.
(2.70)
0.500
(12.70)
0.249
(6.32 + 0.03/–0.02)
Wide
2
2
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
Dimensions
2
2
E
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
2
2
2
0.876 ± 0.003
(22.25 ± 0.10)
0.483 ± 0.002
(12.27 ± 0.007)
1.075 ± 0.003
(27.30 ± 0.10)
Panel
Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)
1.075 ± 0.003
(27.30 ± 0.10)
Panel Opening
Notes
1 Splashguard is CUR marked, but does not have ENEC approval.
2 All circuits also recommended 10A, 28 Vdc.
3
See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
2
2
V11-T2-50
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Panel
Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)
Panel Opening
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
2.6
High Inrush Rockers
2
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number
and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Non-Illuminated High Inrush Rockers
Example:
Rating
UL/CSA: 1
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
2PST
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
ON
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
1600H
DOWN 2
Position Base
Circuit
Number
OFF
1600H
OFF
1620H 3
OFF
2600H
M 2
1
2
E 038
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
2
Circuit
Number
Finish
5
4
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
10
2
Terminal Type
Blank = Standard
M = Matte
1
2
2
2
Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
2
2
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
2
2
How To Order—Illuminated High Inrush Rockers
Example:
Rating
UL/CSA: 1
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
—
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
1600H
1PST
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
DOWN 2
Position Base
Circuit
Number
OFF
1600H
OFF
1620HX 6
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
Poles
and
Throw
2600H
R
2
1
E
038
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Circuit
Number
5
18
19
Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)
Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
2
Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
28
Terminal Type
—
Indicator
Indicator
—
1609
32
Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 8
5 = 12V filament 8
6 = 24V filament 8
2
2
2
2
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
2
2
2
Notes
1 UL, CSA: 1 hp at 125V or 250 Vac; 6A, 125 Vac (L) rating; 10A, 14 Vdc.
Marked on request only.
2 1600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminal #2.
2600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
3 1620H switch is supplied in 2600H base.
4 No code required.
5 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
6 1620H switch is supplied in 2600H type base. (Must have “X” code.)
7 1600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminal #3.
1620H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
8 6V, 12V, 24V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-51
2.6
2
2
2
2
2
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Technical Data and Specifications
1600/2600—Midsize AC Rated
Description
Specification
Description
Specification
Ratings
See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-48 to V11-T2-51.
Insulation resistance
100M ohms minimum
Dielectric withstand
1000V rms minimum
Circuits
Standard
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT maintained and momentary
High inrush option
1PST, 2PST maintained
Terminal types
Contact mechanism
Standard
6.3 mm tabs/0.250 in quick connect
Optional
Solder lug
Standard
Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
High inrush option
Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break
Termination material
Common (center)
Copper fine silver-plated
2
Make—High inrush option
100A, 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles min.
End
Copper
Break—High inrush option
16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles min.
Lamp
2
Contact material
Silver inlay over copper
Mounting
See dimensions below
Contact resistance
10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc
Operating temperature range
32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)
2
Mechanical life
50,000 cycles minimum
2
Dimensions
2
1600/1600H Type Base
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
36°
Combination Quick
Connect/Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.33 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.82 ± 0.02) Thick
0.279 ± 0.004
(7.10 ± 0.10)
0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)
2
2
2
2
2
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom.
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)
Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only
Panel Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)
Panel Opening
2600/2600H Type Base
1.197 (30.40)
Max.
0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)
36˚
0.287 (7.30)
Max.
18˚
1.023 ± 0.004
(26.00 ± 0.10)
2
0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)
Combination Quick
Connect/Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.33 ± 0.03) Wide
(0.032 ± 0.001
(0.82 ± 0.02) Thick
2
2
0.474 ± 0.002
(12.05 ± 0.05)
0.483 ± 0.003
(12.27 ± 0.07)
0.756 (19.20) Nom.
2
2
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom.
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
2
2
1.070
(27.18)
Max.
0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)
2
2
0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)
0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.422 ± 0.004
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.351 ± 0.010/0.11
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
2
2
18°
0.287 (7.30)
Max.
2
2
Brass
0.622 ± 0.007
(15.80 ± 0.20)
1.082 ± 0.004
(26.10 ± 0.10)
0.422 ± 0.004
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
0.327 (8.31)
Nom.
1.070 (27.18) Max.
0.279 ± 0.004 (7.10 ± 0.10)
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom.
0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)
0.351 ± 0.010/0.11
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
0.756 (19.20)
Nom.
Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only
2
V11-T2-52
0.876 ± 0.004
(22.25 ± 0.10)
0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom.
0.636 ± 0.030
(16.17 ± 0.755)
0.866 + 0.004/–0.008
(22.00 + 0.10/–0.20)
Panel Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)
Panel Opening
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
2.6
Accessories
2
Panel Cutout Fillers
If panel cutout fillers are
required in anticipation of
future rocker or paddle
switch installation, order
Catalog Number 1609DUM.
2
Specify color of base and filler
portion by using the standard
two-digit color code (base
and lever) for non-illuminated
switches.
2
2
Example: 1609DUM11
2
Legends
2
How To Order—Legends
2
To order a rocker with a legend marking, add the three-character code to the end of the
catalog number. Example: 1500-21E becomes 1500-21E038.
Legends are for 1500/2500 and 1600/2600 only.
2
Most Popular Legends 1
Legend
Code
Legend
014
Code
Legend
653
2
Code
2
735
2
I
0
ON
0
Legend
714
OFF
I
Code
0
2
023
POW
656
725
746
2
ER
I
2
0
038
657
730
ON
0
O FF
I
039
671
2
752
2
2
734
2
760
2
ON
OFF
0
2
630
2
2
2
Note
1 For additional legend options, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-53
2.7
2
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Contents
Rockette Series
Description
2
Page
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Standard Rockette Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
V11-T2-55
V11-T2-56
V11-T2-57
V11-T2-58
V11-T2-58
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Features and Benefits
Options
These rocker switches offer
the widest selection of
features available, providing
the design flexibility needed
to fill the requirements of a
variety of applications. They
are available in two versions:
standard and sealed.
Voltages
●
110 Vac neon
●
14 Vdc and 28 Vdc
On the illuminated version,
the lamp is wired to operate
in conjunction with the
switch on single-throw
circuit; on double-throw
circuits, the lamp is
independent of the switch
Standard and Sealed
●
Additional colors of rockers
and bezels are available
●
Hot stamped or pad
printed legends on rocker
and bezel
●
Paddle actuators
●
Single rocker operator on
two- and three-pole circuits
●
Dry circuits capabilities
●
Special ratings
●
Reversing jumpers
●
Dead back cover (two-pole
base) with wire leads
●
Special circuits
●
Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●
Metal snap-in bezels
●
Foam dust seal
The Sealed Rockette features
a silicone rubber seal that
protects contacts and
mechanisms. All switches
resist contaminants such as
sand, dust and moisture with
both a base-to-frame seal
and an actuator seal. Nonilluminated and illuminated
versions are available. For
Sealed Rockette selection,
see table on Page V11-T2-56.
2
2
2
●
Mounting
Flush (two screws), sub-panel
and snap-in mounting
●
●
Snap-in Mounting
Convenient front panel
or sub-panel snap-in
mounting
Available in single- and twopole non-illuminated or in
single-pole illuminated
Rockette switches. Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative for three- and
four-pole circuits
Unless otherwise noted,
all switches with snap-in
mounting are UL Recognized
and CSA Certified
2
Sealed Only
●
Special voltage bulbs
●
Industry standard
connector available
●
Two-pole illuminated circuit
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-54
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
UL Recognized
CSA Certified
RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Standard Rockette Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Standard Rockette Switches
Example:
Rating
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
Poles
and
Throw
2PST
1000W, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
20A, 250 Vac
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac 1
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
DOWN
Position
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
8150K21
C
2PST
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
ON
ON
8155K21
8155K20
8155K22
C
4PDT
ON
OFF
ON
8130K20
4PST
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
ON
ON
8140K21
8140K20
8140K22
2PDT
2PDT
2PDT
4PDT
E
6
T
50
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Base
Circuit
Number
8132K21
8132K20
8132K22
8138K20
8138K30
8142K21
8147K21
8142K20
8142K22
8148K20
8148K30
2PST
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
8132K21
2
3
Circuit
Number
C
3
3
D
C
D
D
3
F
E
F
4
Mounting Frame 5
All Except
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
E = Mounting, 2-pole
F = Mounting, 2-pole
G = Mounting, 2-pole
W = Snap-in
X = Snap-in
Y = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
H = Mounting, 4-pole
Rocker/Paddle Style
All Except
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
6 = 2-pole
7 = 2-pole
20 = 2-pole 7
37 = 2-pole 8
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
14 = 4-pole
2
Rocker/Paddle Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black
Terminal Type
50 = Screw
51 = Solder lugs
52 = 0.250 in spade
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 These switches also have marked rating of 7A at 277 Vac and 3/4 hp at 277 Vac.
2 Add code letters and numbers for mounting frame, rocker style and color and terminal construction.
3 Also rated 2A, 277 Vac; 2.5A, L125 Vac.
4 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
5 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
6 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.
7 Cannot be used with snap-in mounting bezel.
8 Recommended for use with snap-in mounting.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-55
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Sealed Rockette Switches
2
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rating
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT
2PST
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
Rating
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT
ON
MOM. ON
2
2
0.250 in
Spade
8055K23
8055K20
8055K26
8055K29
8055K32
8055K43
8055K40
8055K46
8055K49
8055K52
Solder
Lugs
8055K24
8055K21
8055K27
8055K30
8055K33
8055K44
8055K41
8055K47
8055K50
8055K53
Screw
8055K25
8055K22
8055K28
8055K31
8055K34
8055K45
8055K42
8055K48
8055K51
8055K54
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Circuit
Number
1
A
B
C
D
Mounting Frame
E = Standard
F = Standard
L = Standard
X = Snap-in
W = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in
2
Rocker Color
M = White
V = Black
Rocker Style 3
1 = Two-face serrated
2 = Three-face smooth
7 = Concave
NONE
OFF
DOWN
Position
OFF
ON
8057K23
Base Circuit Number
Terminal Type
0.250 in
Spade
8057K23
8057K29
Circuit
Solder
Number
1
Screw
Lugs
8057K24 8057K25 G
8057K30 8057K31 H
E 1
5
V
Mounting Frame
E = Standard
F = Standard
L = Standard
X = Snap-in
W = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in
Notes
1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
2 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
3 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.
2
2
2
V11-T2-56
1
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
2
Rocker Style 3
3 = Serrated w/1 lens
5 = Smooth w/1 lens
8 = Concave w/1 lens
2
2
Base Circuit Number
Terminal Type
V
Bulb Voltage
1 = Neon 110V
3 = 14 Vdc filament
4 = 28 Vdc filament
2
2
OFF
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
2
2
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
DOWN
Position
Example:
2
2
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
E 2
How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Illuminated
2
2
8055K23
Example:
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rocker Color
M = White
V = Black
Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 = Red
4 = Amber
5 = Blue
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
2.7
8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number
and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated
Example:
Circuit with Rocker in …
Rating
30A, 125 Vac
25A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac
UP
Position
Poles
and
Throw
8058K28
Z 7
DOWN
Position
Terminal Type
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Base Circuit Number
CENTER
Position
2
V
0.250 in
Spade
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Circuit
Number
1
2
1PST
ON
NONE
OFF
N/A
N/A
8058K10
A
1PDT
ON
OFF
ON
N/A
N/A
8058K22
B
1PDT
ON
NONE
ON
N/A
N/A
8058K28
B
1PDT
MOM ON
OFF
ON
N/A
N/A
8058K31
B
1PDT
MOM ON
OFF
MOM ON
N/A
N/A
8058K34
B
3
Mounting Frame
E = Standard ears up with two
tapped holes
F = Standard flat with two holes
X = Metal snap-in
Z = Standard plastic snap-in
W = Contour plastic snap-in
L = Standard ears up with
two holes
2
Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black
2
2
2
2
2
4
Rocker Style
1 = Two-face serrated
2 = Three-face smooth
7 = Concave
2
2
8058K22E7V
8058K10X7T
8058K28Z7V
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Supplied with terminal screws, (Cat. No. 11-8616), unassembled.
2 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
3 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
4 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-57
2.7
2
2
2
2
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Description
Specification
Description
Specification
Ratings and
circuits
Contact
mechanism
See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-55 to V11-T2-57.
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc.
Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism.
Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC applications
1000W rated
Movable—Checon SK015B contact material welded to contactor
Stationary—Copper with cad-oxide contact face button
Terminal types
Screw terminals—Brass designed to accept #6-32 x 3/16 binding head
screws (Cat. No. 811-2), furnished unassembled
Solder lug—0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade
Termination
material
Screw and spade—Brass
Solder— Tintillate-plated brass
Lamp voltages
110 Vac neon
14 Vdc and 28 Vdc
Mounting
Flush (two screws), sub-panel and snap-in mounting
2
Contact material
3–6A rated
2
10–15A rated
2
Rockers
20A rated
2
Movable—Silver-plated copper
Stationary—Silver-plated copper
Movable—Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact
face button
Stationary—Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Movable—Silver-plated copper with cad-oxide contact
face button
Stationary—Copper with cad-oxide contact face button
2
Dimensions
2
Base Standard Rockette Switch Dimensions
Snap-In Mounting Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Terminals
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type W
Type X
2
2
2
#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78)
Lg. Binding Head
Term. Screw
0.125
(3.18)
Dia. Hole
0.040
(1.02)
2
0.188
(4.78)
2
Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped
2
0.288
(7.32)
Contoured Snap-In
Bezel, Two-Pole Base
0.040
(1.02)
Snap-In Bezel, Single-, Twoand Four-Pole Bases
1.550 ± 0.010
(39.37 ± 0.254)
2.06
(52.32)
Screw Terminal
1.12
(28.44)
2
0.900 ± 0.010
(22.86 ± 0.254)
2
Type Y
Type Z
2
Sub-Panel Snap-In Mounting Bezel,
Single- and Two-Pole Bases
Snap-In Mounting Bezel,
Two-Pole Base Only
1.94
(49.27)
1.700
(43.18)
2
2
2
2
2
0.960
(24.38)
Panel Opening
2
125°C
Approx.
2
1.450 1.190
(36.83) (30.23)
2
0.680 (17.27)
2
0.830
(21.08)
2
Panel Thickness
0.040–0.140 (1.02–3.56)
2
V11-T2-58
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Frame Types and Rocker/Paddle Styles for Standing Switches—Non-Illuminated Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types
2
Type E
Type F
Style 37 with Type X
1.940 (49.28)
2.500 (63.50)
1.620
(41.15)
2.250
(57.15)
CC
0.380
(9.65)
2
0.100 (2.54)
CC
0.380
(9.65)
0.850 ± 0.030
(21.59 ± 0.76)
2
0.380 ± 0.030
(9.65 ± 0.76)
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes
#6-32 Tap 2 Holes
2
17.5° 0.200 (5.08)
2
0.640 ± 0.254
(16.26 ± 6.45)
Type G
2
2.120 (53.85)
1.750
(44.45)
2
CC
0.380
(9.65)
2
Mounting Type
Recommended with This Style
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes
2
Two-Pole Rocker Styles
Style 6
Style 7
0.650
(16.51)
17.5°
0.650
(16.51)
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.660
(16.76)
CC
CC
Four-Pole Mounting Frame Type
Type H
2
R 0.100
(R 2.54)
2
0.830
(21.08)
0.100
(2.54)
0.880
(22.35)
0.580
(14.73)
2
Style 20
2
CC
2
2
Four-Pole Rocker Styles
Style 14
1.940 (49.28)
1.620
(41.15)
1.300
(33.02)
2
R 0.610
(R 15.49)
2
CC
2
CC
2
#6-32
Tap 2 Holes
2
2
Reference Dimension “CC”—Top of Frame to Bottom of Terminal
Dimension in Inches (mm)
Dimension in Inches (mm)
Mounting Frame Type
Mounting Frame Type
Two-Pole
Four-Pole
2
Rocker
Style
Type E
Type F
Type G
Recommended
Panel Opening
Rocker
Style
Type H
Recommended
Panel Opening
2
6
0.08 (2.03)
0.42 (10.67)
0.42 (10.67)
0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
14
1.34 x 1.25 (34.04 x 31.75)
7
0.08 (2.03)
0.42 (10.67)
0.42 (10.67)
0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
2
20
N/A
0.42 (10.67)
0.42 (10.67)
N/A
37
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.08 (2.03)
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-59
2.7
2
2
2
2
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Base Sealed Rockette Switch Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Sealed Two-Pole—Mounting Frame Type E—Rocker Style 1
17.5˚
1.940 (49.28)
0.080
(2.03)
1.620 (41.15)
2
Quick
Connect
Term.
0.648 (16.46)
#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg.
Binding Head
Term. Screws
6-32 Tap
0.250 (6.35)
0.750
(19.05)
0.031 (0.79) Ref.
0.288
0.040
(7.32)
(1.02)
Screw Terminal
1.330
(33.83)
2
2
Sealed Two-Pole—Mounting Frame Type F—Rocker Style 1
2
R 1.135
(R 28.83)
2
2
Panel Opening
35˚
17.5˚
2.500 (63.50)
R 0.610
(R 15.49) 0.722
(18.34)
0.453
(11.51)
0.032
(0.81)
0.031/0.033
(0.79/0.84)
0.250
(6.35)
0.062
(1.57)
2.250 (57.15)
2 Mtg. Holes
0.172 (4.37) Dia.
2.020 (51.31)
0.260 (6.60)
2
BB
1.062 (26.97)
2
0.031
(0.79)
0.250
(6.35)
Type X
Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped
0.390
(9.91)
#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg.
Binding Head
Term. Screws
0.031 (0.79) Ref.
0.040
0.288
(1.02)
(7.32)
Screw Terminal
Type Z
1.550 ± 0.010
(39.37 ± 0.254)
1.700
(43.18)
2
0.960
(24.38)
0.900 ± 0.010
(22.86 ± 0.254)
Snap-In Mounting Bezel
Snap-In Bezel
2
Reference Dimensions “AA” and “BB” in Inches (mm) 1
Terminal
Type
Dimension “AA” (Two-Pole)
E Frame
F Frame
L Frame
Dimension “BB”
W Frame
X Frame
Z Frame
All Frames
Screw
1.39 (35.33)
1.05 (26.62)
1.39 (35.33) 1.37 (34.82)
1.39 (35.34) 1.37 (34.82)
0.30 (7.62)
Solder lug
1.36 (34.57)
1.02 (25.86)
1.36 (34.57) 1.34 (34.06)
1.36 (34.51) 1.34 (34.06)
0.27 (6.86)
0.250 in spade 1.53 (38.89)
1.19 (30.18)
1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38)
1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38)
0.44 (11.18)
8058 Screw 2 1.509 (38.33) 1.145 (29.08) 1.509 (38.33) 1.808 (45.92) 1.627 (41.33) 1.528 (38.81)
0.460 (11.68)
Notes
1 Dimension “AA”—Top of frame to bottom of terminal; “BB”—from bottom of base to bottom of terminal.
2 #8-32 x 1/4 Phillips screw.
2
V11-T2-60
0.040
(1.02)
0.188
(4.78)
1.620 (41.15)
2
2
1.090
(27.69)
0.125 (3.18)
Dia. Hole
0.280
(7.11)
0.750
(19.05)
2
2
Terminals
0.648
(16.46)
35˚
0.960
AA (24.38)
2
Panel Thickness
0.040–0.140 (1.02–3.56)
1.330 (33.83)
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Sealed Two-Pole Switch—Mounting Frame Type W—Rocker Stye 7
2
0.680
(17.27)
0.830
(21.80)
0.750
(19.05)
2
2
0.648
(16.48)
0.294
(7.47)
Snap-in Mounting Frame Dimensions
0.126
(3.20)
1.190
(30.23)
1.450
(36.83)
0.094
(2.39)
AA
BB
0.032
(0.81) Ref.
125°C
Approx.
Max.
0.812
(20.62)
2
2
0.040
(1.02)
Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped
0.380 (9.65)
BB
2
2
0.188
(4.78)
0.094 (2.39)
0.062
(1.57)
AA
0.032
(0.81)
2
0.125 (3.18)
Dia. Hole
Max.
0.812
(20.62)
0.380 (9.65)
2
2
Terminals
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Dimensions for Frame Type and Rocker Styles—Sealed Switches
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated
2
Single- and Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types
Single-Pole Mounting Frame Types
Type E
Type E
2
1.940 (49.28)
1.620
(41.15)
0.380
(9.65)
1.940 (49.28)
1.620
(41.15)
CC
#6-32 Tap 2 Holes
2
0.380
(9.65)
2
CC
2
#6-32 Tap 2 Holes
Type F
2
Type F
2.500 (63.50)
2.500 (63.50)
0.380
(9.65)
2.250 (57.15)
2
0.380
(9.65)
2.250 (57.15)
CC
2
CC
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes
2
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes
Type L
Type L
1.940 (49.28)
2
1.940 (49.28)
1.620
(41.15)
CC
1.620 (41.15)
0.380 (9.65)
0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole
0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole
2
0.380 (9.65)
Single- and Two-Pole Rocker Styles
Single-Pole Rocker Styles
Style 1
Style 3
2
2
2
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.650
(16.51)
2
CC
0.650
(16.51)
CC
0.216
(5.49)
Style 2
2
CC
0.360
(9.14)
2
Style 5
2
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.650
(16.51)
0.650
(16.51)
CC
0.216
(5.49)
Style 7
2
CC
0.360
(9.14)
2
Style 8
R 1.135 (R 28.83)
0.650
(16.51)
R 0.610
(R 15.49)
0.350
(8.89)
0.650 0.496 R 0.610
(16.51) (12.60) (R 15.49)
CC
2
R 1.135 (R 28.83)
2
CC
2
2
Reference Dimension “CC”—Top of Frame to Rocker Face
Dimension in Inches (mm)
2
Dimension in Inches (mm)
Mounting Frame Type
Mounting Frame Type
Rocker Single- and Two-Pole (Non-Illuminated)
Style E Frame
F Frame
L Frame
Recommended Panel Opening
Rocker
Style
Single- and Two-Pole (Illuminated)
E Frame
F Frame
L Frame
Recommended Panel Opening
1
0.08 (2.03)
0.42 (10.67)
0.08 (2.03)
0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
3
0.08 (2.03)
0.42 (10.67)
0.08 (2.03)
0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
2
0.08 (2.03)
0.42 (10.67)
0.08 (2.03)
0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
5
0.08 (2.03)
0.42 (10.67)
0.08 (2.03)
0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
7
0.11 (2.79)
0.45 (11.43)
0.11 (2.79)
0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
8
0.11 (2.79)
0.45 (11.43)
0.11 (2.79)
0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-61
2.8
2
Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR
Contents
8006/8007 Series
Description
2
Page
8006/8007—EURO SR
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
V11-T2-63
V11-T2-64
V11-T2-64
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Features and Benefits
Options
Field-proven in America’s
roughest off-road
applications, the standard
size EURO SR is one tough
and reliable rocker switch.
Available with the complete
range of rugged single- and
two-pole, illuminated or
non-illuminated circuits.
Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.
Additional colors of rockers
and bezels are available
●
Special circuits
●
Special ratings
●
Pad-printed legends on
rocker and bezel
●
Special voltage bulbs
●
Dry circuit capabilities
●
Foam dust seal
●
Reversing jumpers
●
Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●
Wire leads
●
Dead back cover
●
Palm guard
●
Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
●
EURO SR panel plug:
53-3318
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
The EURO SR Series offers
snap-in mounting and can be
provided with a durable
silicone seal that resists dust
and moisture.
All EURO SR switches are
molded in an aesthetically
pleasing matte finish and
operate with a crisp tactile
feel, allowing for easy
actuation.
The EURO SR will accept
loads up to 15A. Terminal
numbers are stamped on
base for easy identification.
2
●
Rocker Material
Thermoplastic rocker
actuators. Different colors are
available. Rocker and bezel
are a high-grade nylon
supplied with matte finish.
●
●
Lamps
Five lamp voltages—14 Vdc,
18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon
and 250 Vac neon—are
offered as standard. For
additional lamp voltages,
please contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●
Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.
Seal
Available in sealed and nonsealed versions. Sealed
devices are furnished with
silicone rubber seal, providing
moisture and dust resistance
with an IP67 rating.
●
2
2
2
●
Lens Options
●
Lens Part Numbers
(if ordered separately)
Green . . . . . . . . . . 28-5415
Amber . . . . . . . .28-5415-2
Red. . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-4
White . . . . . . . . .28-5415-5
2
2
2
V11-T2-62
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
2.8
Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR
EURO SR Standard Size Euro-Style Rocker Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—EURO SR, Non-Illuminated
Example:
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
2PST
2PDT
2PDT 2
2PDT 3
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
2-3
2-3 1
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
5-6
8006K23
N
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
5-6
5-3
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
OFF
5-1
0.250 in
Spade
8006K23
8006K35
8006K20
8006K26
8006K29
8006K32
8006K43
8006K55
8006K40
8006K46
8006K49
8006K52
8006K58
8006K61
Solder
Lugs
8006K24
8006K36
8006K21
8006K27
8006K30
8006K33
8006K44
8006K56
8006K41
8006K47
8006K50
8006K53
8006K59
8006K62
T
2
1
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Terminal Type
DOWN
Position
1
Mounting Frame
Color /Style
N = Black/standard
T = Black/top half
palm guard
B = Black/bottom half
palm guard
Screw
8006K25
8006K37
8006K22
8006K28
8006K31
8006K34
8006K45
8006K57
8006K42
8006K48
8006K51
8006K54
8006K60
8006K63
Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed
Rocker Style
1 = Two-face
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
How To Order—EURO SR, Illuminated
Example:
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
2PST
2PDT
45
4
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
OFF
NONE
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
8007K23
N
2-1
2-11
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
2-1, 5-4
NONE
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
0.250 in
Spade
8007K23
8007K35
8007K20
8007K26
8007K29
8007K32
8007K43
8007K55
8007K40
8007K46
8007K49
8007K52
Solder
Lugs
8007K24
8007K36
8007K21
8007K27
8007K30
8007K33
8007K44
8007K56
8007K41
8007K47
8007K50
8007K53
1
3 T
2
2
1
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Terminal Type
DOWN
Position
4
Screw
8007K25
8007K37
8007K22
8007K28
8007K31
8007K34
8007K45
8007K57
8007K42
8007K48
8007K51
8007K54
Mounting Frame
Color /Style
N = Black/standard
T = Black/top half
palm guard
B = Black/bottom
half palm
guard
Bulb Voltage
1 = 125V neon 7
2 = 250V neon 7
3 = 14 Vdc 8
4 = 28 Vdc 8
7 = 18 Vdc 8
Lamp Wiring
1 = Dependent
2 = Independent
Rocker Style
3 = Two-face
w/1 lens 6
4 = Two-face
w/2 lenses 4
Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black
2
Lens Color
1 = White
2 = Red
3 = Green
4 = Amber
5 = No lens
6 = Blue
7 = Clear
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed
Notes
1 Momentary contact.
2
3A at 250 Vac, 6A at 125 Vac.
3 1/4 hp at 125–250 Vac.
4 All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp
centered in open-pole of base.
5 Not standard with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4.
6 Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4 for all double-throw switches.
7 Available on single-pole versions only.
8 14 Vdc, 18 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.8
2
2
2
Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR
Technical Data and Specifications
8006/8007—EURO SR
Description
Specification
Ratings
15A at 125 Vac
10A at 250 Vac
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
(hp rating does not apply to lighted switches)
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT
Maintained and momentary action
Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
25,000 operations minimum at full load
Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm)
Spade—Brass
Screw—Brass (terminal screws provided unassembled)
Solder—Tintillate-plated brass
Thermoset molding material
Thermoplastic rocker actuators
1000V rms, minimum
IP67 (with optional seal)
Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Circuits
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Terminal types
Base material
Rocker material
Dielectric
Seal level
Mounting means
Operating temperature
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated
2
Illuminated
1.705 ± 0.011
(43.31 ± 0.31)
R 0.156 ± 0.010
(R 3.96 ± 0.25)
2
Palm Guard
2
2
2
1.427 + 0.020/– 0.012
(36.25 + 0.51/– 0.38)
1
2
3
1.450
(36.85)
1.190
(30.23)
2
2
0.250 ± 0.004
(6.35 ± 0.08)
0.030 (0.813) Thick
0.440 ± 0.005
(11.18 ± 0.13)
2
0.830
(21.08)
4
0.680 (17.27)
0.389 ±0.040
(9.88 ±1.02)
0.096 ±0.010
(2.44 ±0.25)
1.082 ± 0.012
(27.48 ± 0.30)
2
2
R 0.156 ±0.005
(3.97 ±0.13)
0.096 ± 0.010
(2.44 ± 0.25)
2
2
0.957 ± 0.012
(24.31 ± 0.30)
0.389 ± 0.041
(9.88 ± 1.06)
2
2
1.705 ± 0.011
(43.31 ± 0.31)
0.957 ± 0.012
(24.31 ± 0.30)
2
2
R 0.156 ± 0.010
(R 3.96 ± 0.25)
5
1.705 ±0.012
(43.31 ±0.30)
1.220 ±0.012
(30.99 ±0.30)
6
0.820 ± 0.005
(20.83 ± 0.13)
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.040 to 0.140 (1.02 to 3.56)
Best Results Obtained from:
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.18)
2
V11-T2-64
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
2.9
Contents
8004/8005–Euro Full Size
Description
Page
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T2-66
V11-T2-67
V11-T2-67
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Features and Benefits
Options
Eaton’s 8004 and 8005 EuroLook Series features matte
finish European styling and
snap-in mounting. These
durable switches, field-tested
in the most demanding truck
and marine applications, are
available with a variety of
standard actuator options.
Options include concave,
two-face, illuminated, nonilluminated and the recessed
feature, which allows
placement of your label on
the face of our rocker. All
switches in this rugged lineup
can be fitted with a silicone
rubber seal to provide
moisture and dust-resistance.
Additionally, these switches
can be gang-mounted into a
single panel opening. Panel
blanks are also available.
●
Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.
Additional colors of rockers
and mounting bezels are
available
●
Special circuits
●
Special ratings
●
Gold contacts
●
Dry circuit capabilities
●
Pad-printed legends on
rocker and bezel
●
Special lamp voltages
●
Foam dust seal
●
Reversing jumpers
●
Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●
Dead back cover (two-pole
base) with wire leads
●
Matching indicators
●
Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
●
Full size Euro-Look gang
mounting systems
●
Full size Euro-Look panel
plugs: 17-19544-2
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
Rocker Material
Custom styled, multi-colored
thermoplastic rocker
actuators. The rocker and
bezel are supplied with a
matte finish.
●
Lamps
Five lamp voltages—14 Vdc,
18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon
and 250 Vac neon—are
offered as standard. For
additional lamp voltages,
please contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●
Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.
●
●
Seal
Available in sealed and nonsealed versions. Sealed
devices are furnished with a
silicone rubber seal providing
moisture and dust resistance
with an IP54 rating.
●
2
Lens Options
●
Lens Part Numbers
(if ordered separately)
8005 Two-Face
Green . . . . . . . . . 28-3425
Amber . . . . . . . . 28-3425-2
Red . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-4
White . . . . . . . . 28-3425-5
8005 Concave
Red . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148
Green . . . . . . . . 28-5148-2
Amber . . . . . . . . 28-5148-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-4
Clear . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-5
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
RoHS Compliant 1
2
2
2
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-65
2.9
Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Full Size, Euro-Look Rocker Switches
2
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—Full Size Euro, Non-Illuminated
Example:
2
2
2
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
2
1PST
2
1PDT
2
2
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
2PDT
2
2PDT 2
2PDT 3
2
2
2PST
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
2-3
2-3 1
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
5-6
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
5-6
5-3
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
OFF
5-1
Example:
Rating
2
2
0.250 in
Spade
8004K23
8004K35
8004K20
8004K26
8004K29
8004K32
8004K43
8004K55
8004K40
8004K46
8004K49
8004K52
8004K58
8004K61
Solder
Lugs
8004K24
8004K36
8004K21
8004K27
8004K30
8004K33
8004K44
8004K56
8004K41
8004K47
8004K50
8004K53
8004K59
8004K62
1
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
2
2PST
2PDT
2
2
2
2
2
1
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Mounting
Frame Color
N = Black
M = White
T = Red
G = Gray
Screw
8004K25
8004K37
8004K22
8004K28
8004K31
8004K34
8004K45
8004K57
8004K42
8004K48
8004K51
8004K54
8004K60
8004K63
Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black
G = Gray
Rocker Style
0 = Recessed
1 = Two-face
6 = Paddle
7 = Concave
45
4
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
OFF
NONE
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
8005K23
N
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed
2-1
2-1 1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
2-1, 5-4
NONE
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
0.250 in
Spade
8005K23
8005K35
8005K20
8005K26
8005K29
8005K32
8005K43
8005K55
8005K40
8005K46
8005K49
8005K52
Solder
Lugs
8005K24
8005K36
8005K21
8005K27
8005K30
8005K33
8005K44
8005K56
8005K41
8005K47
8005K50
8005K53
1
3 T
2
1
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Terminal Type
DOWN
Position
4
Screw
8005K25
8005K37
8005K22
8005K28
8005K31
8005K34
8005K45
8005K57
8005K42
8005K48
8005K51
8005K54
Mounting
Frame Color
N = Black
M = White
T = Red
G = Gray
Bulb Voltage
1 = 125V neon 7
2 = 250V neon 7
3 = 14 Vdc 8
4 = 28 Vdc 8
7 = 18 Vdc 8
2
2
T
How To Order—Full Size Euro, Illuminated
2
2
N
Terminal Type
DOWN
Position
NONE
2
2
8004K23
Lamp Wiring
1 = Dependent
2 = Independent
Rocker Style
2 = Recessed
w/1 lens 6
3 = Two-face
w/1 lens 6
4 = Two-face
w/2 lenses 4
5 = Recessed
w/2 lenses 4
8 = Concave
w/1 lens 6
9 = Concave
w/2 lenses 4
Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black
G = Gray
Lens Color
2 = Red
3 = Green
4 = Amber
5 = No lens
6 = Blue
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed
Notes
1 Momentary contact.
2 3A at 250 Vac, 5A at 125 Vac.
3
1/4 hp at 125–250 Vac.
4
All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp
centered in open-pole of base.
5 Not standard available with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9.
6 Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9 for all double-throw switches.
7 Available on single-pole versions only.
8 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit.
V11-T2-66
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.9
Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Technical Data and Specifications
2
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
2
Description
Specification
Ratings
15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
(hp rating does not apply to lighted switches)
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT; Maintained and momentary action
Movable—Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
25,000 operations minimum at full load
Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade—Brass
Screw—Brass #6-32 x 3/16 (terminal screws provided unassembled)
Solder—Tintillate-plated brass; tintillate spade terminals
Thermoset molding material
1000V rms, minimum
IP54 (with optional seal)
Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
Circuits
Contact material
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Terminal types
Base material
Dielectric
Seal level
Mounting means
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated
2
Illuminated
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
2
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
R 0.004 ± 0.005
(R 0.125 ± 0.13)
1.440 ± 0.010
(36.58 ± 0.25)
R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ.
0.519 ± 0.005
(13.18 ± 0.13)
R 0.004 ± 0.005
(R 0.125 ± 0.13)
1.440 ± 0.010
(36.58 ± 0.25)
R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ.
0.519 ± 0.005
(13.18 ± 0.13)
2
2
2
Surface Length Along
Bottom of Recess:
1.122 ± 0.012 (28.50 ± 0.31)
1.087 ± 0.005
(27.61 ± 0.13)
0.090 ± 0.005
(2.29 ± 0.13)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
0.689 ± 0.010
(17.50 ± 0.25)
Surface Length Along
Bottom of Recess:
1.122 ± 0.012 (28.50 ± 0.31)
1.087 ± 0.005
(27.61 ± 0.13)
0.090 ± 0.005
(2.29 ± 0.13)
R 0.060 (R 1.52)
0.080 (2.03)
0.080 (2.03)
0.395 ± 0.029
(10.03 ± 0.76)
0.440 ± 0.010
(11.18 ± 0.25)
1.602 ± 0.029
(40.69 ± 0.76)
0.031 (0.79)
0.250 ± 0.032 (6.35 ± 0.81)
0.001 (0.032) Thick
1
1
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30)
0.328 ± 0.015
(8.33 ± 0.38)
2 3
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)
4
5
6
0.687 ± 0.015
(17.45 ± 0.38)
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
4
5
2
2
2
2
2
0.031 (0.79)
0.250 ± 0.032 (6.35 ± 0.81)
0.001 (0.032) Thick
0.328 ± 0.015
(8.33 ± 0.38)
2 3
0.440 ± 0.010
(11.18 ± 0.25)
1.602 ± 0.029
(40.69 ± 0.76)
2
2
R 0.060 (R 1.52)
0.395 ± 0.029
(10.03 ± 0.76)
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
0.689 ± 0.010
(17.50 ± 0.25)
2
2
2
6
0.687 ± 0.015
(17.45 ± 0.38)
2
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30)
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-67
2.10
2
Rockers
X Series Rockers
Contents
X Series Rockers—XR
Description
2
Page
X Series Rockers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Light Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
V11-T2-69
V11-T2-70
V11-T2-70
V11-T2-70
V11-T2-71
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
The Electrical Sector is
pleased to offer X Series
Rockers for use in outdoor
applications to meet almost
every market need.
These sleek style rockers
are molded in a unique
smooth matte finish. The
bezel is also unique with
a more modern roundedrectangular design with an
oval shaped rocker. X Series
Rockers are available in
single- and double-pole with
various circuit options, LED
illumination, and laser
etching.
●
Frames and actuator colors
are black
●
Switches provided with
0.025 spade quick connect
terminals
Application Description
Features and Benefits
Options
Market Applications
Seal
Standard IP56 Sealing per
IES 60529.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Agriculture
Bus
Commercial
Marine
Specialty Vehicle
Truck
Illumination
Standard LED voltages
offered include 14 Vdc and
125 Vac.
●
Material
Frames are nylon and
actuators are nylon with glass
fiber with both meeting UL
flame: 94HB. Terminals are
silver plated brass.
●
●
Panel plug: 53-3318
Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
For information on optional
features, contact your
local Eaton Sales
Representative.
●
●
Mounting Means
Easy snap-in mounting with
plastic bezel.
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
T85
RoHS Compliant
●
Label
Eaton part number etched on
switch for easy inventory
management.
Product Selection Guide
Seal
Actuator
Decorative
Termination
Illumination
Top
✔
Rocker without bezel
—
Laser-etch
✔
Spade
✔
Incandescent 6 Vdc
—
Neon 110V
—
Bottom
—
Rocker with bezel
✔
Pad-print
—
Solder
—
Incandescent 12 Vdc
—
Neon 125V
—
Panel
—
Paddle
—
Screw
—
Incandescent 14 Vdc
—
Neon 250V
—
2
Snap-in lens
—
Poles
Weld lugs
—
Incandescent 18 Vdc
—
14 Vdc LED
✔
Locking
—
Single
✔
Incandescent 24 Vdc
—
28 Vdc LED
—
2
Label
—
Double
✔
Incandescent 28 Vdc
—
125 Vac LED
✔
Four
—
277 Vac LED
—
2
2
2
V11-T2-68
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.10
Rockers
X Series Rockers
X Series Rockers
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
Standard rating 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V
Also recommended for use in applications up to 21A 14 Vdc
IP56 per IES 60529
2
2
Product Selection
XR Series Rocker
2
X Series Rockers
Lamp
Voltage
Switch
Function
Light
Circuit 3
Lens Color
T. 1-4
None
SPST OFF-ON
X = None
None
SPST OFF-ON
X = None
SPST OFF-ON
E=
SPST OFF-ON
14 Vdc LED
None
125 Vac LED 1
T. 3-6
Switch
Markings
Catalog Number
None
Int’l ON/OFF 4
XRXAXXXNV1CU
None
None
ON/OFF 4
XRXAXXXNV1DB
None
Amber
None
XR1AEX4NV1XX
E=
None
Green
None
XR1AEX3NV1XX
SPST OFF-ON
E=
None
Red
None
XR1AEX2NV1XX
SPDT ON-ON
G=
Amber
Amber
None
XR1CG44NV1XX
SPDT ON-ON
G=
Green
Green
None
XR1CG33NV1XX
SPDT ON-OFF-ON
G=
Amber
Amber
None
XR1BG44NV1XX
SPDT ON-OFF-ON
G=
Green
Green
None
XR1BG33NV1XX
SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)
G=
Amber
Amber
None
XR1EG44NV1XX
SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)
G=
Green
Green
None
2
X = None
None
None
Int’l ON/OFF
DPST OFF-ON 2
X = None
None
None
ON/OFF 4
XRXMXXXNV1DB
DPST OFF-ON
X = None
None
None
None
XRXMXXXNV1XX
DPST ON-ON
X = None
None
None
None
XRXNXXXNV1XX
DPST OFF-ON
2
2
2
2
2
2
XR1EG33NV1XX
4
2
XRXMXXXNV1CU
SPST OFF-ON
E=
None
Amber
None
XR3AEX4NV1XX
SPST OFF-ON
E=
None
Green
None
XR3AEX3NV1XX
SPST OFF-ON
E=
None
Red
None
XR3AEX2NV1XX
SPDT ON-ON
G=
Amber
Amber
None
XR3CG44NV1XX
SPDT ON-ON
G=
Green
Green
None
XR3CG33NV1XX
SPDT ON-OFF-ON
G=
Amber
Amber
None
XR3BG44NV1XX
SPDT ON-OFF-ON
G=
Green
Green
None
XR3BG33NV1XX
SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)
G=
Amber
Amber
None
XR3EG44NV1XX
SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)
G=
Green
Green
None
XR3EG33NV1XX
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Available in AC applications only.
2 Double-pole not available illuminated; it is available laser etched.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-70.
4 See Symbols Library on Page V11-T2-70.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-69
2.10
2
2
Rockers
X Series Rockers
X Series Symbols Library
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
CU
2
DB
2
2
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications
X Series
Description
Specification
2
Ratings
16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V;
recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc
2
Operating temperature
–4° to 176°F (–20° to 80°C)
2
Light Diagrams
2
X Series
2
Light Circuit
Letter
Functions
Light Circuit
Letter
Functions
Light Circuit
Letter
Functions
2
X
All
E
SPST
G
SPDT
2
2
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
5
2
5
3
6
1
2
3
5
6
2
3
5
6
2
5
2
3
6
2
3
5
6
2
2
3
6
Jumpers (3–4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-70
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
X Series Rockers
2.10
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Mounting Hole
2
2
Y
2
X
2
Dimensions
2
Thickness
0.03–0.12
(0.75–3.0)
X
0.83 +0.01
(21.2 +0.1)
2
Y
1.46 + 0.01
(37.0 +0.1)
2
2
X Series
LED 1
2
LED 2
2
0.98
(25.0)
2
2
2
1.81 (46.0)
ON
OFF
ON
0.32
(8.0)
2
2
0.09
(2.2) 1.11
(28.2)
2
2
2
0.25
(6.4)
0.44
(11.2)
2
0.81
(20.7)
2
1.43 (36.2)
2
2
0.81
(20.7)
2
2
0.03
(0.8)
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-71
2.11
2
Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT
Contents
8064/8065 Series
Description
2
Page
8064/8065—ESPORT
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
V11-T2-73
V11-T2-74
V11-T2-74
V11-T2-75
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Features and Benefits
The ergonomically designed
ESPORT Series comes with
a large, independent LEDilluminated indicator window
that clearly identifies the
switch’s labeled function—
your label or ours. The switch
can be ordered with an LED
illuminated actuator, as well.
All ESPORT switches are
molded in a clean matte finish
and operate with a definite
tactile feel. Actuation of the
switch feels crisp. Also,
ESPORT switches will accept
loads up to15A. Due to the
LED’s long life, lamp
replacement should not be
necessary.
Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.
Tested in America’s toughest
truck applications, the
ESPORT switch is reliable
and durable and is available
with a full range of rugged
single- and two-pole circuits.
It has an optional polarized
lock-on connector. Spade
switch terminals are tinplated for long storage life.
●
Rocker Material
Thermoplastic rocker
actuators. Different colors are
available. The rocker and the
bezel are a high-grade nylon
and are supplied with an
aesthetically pleasing matte
finish.
●
Lamps
Durable, long-life LED
illumination; 14 Vdc is
standard. Integral indicator
is illuminated by two
independent green, yellow
or red LEDs while the
actuator is lighted using
one dependent LED. For
additional LED voltages and/
or colors, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●
Options
Lenses
All switches can be ordered
with either a frosted clear
lens (Cat. No. 28-5555) or
a translucent white lens
(Cat. No. 28-5555-2). The
clear lens will allow the
maximum amount of diffused
light to flow through your
label or one of ours. The
white lens is shipped
unassembled to facilitate the
addition of your engraved or
pad-printed legend.
●
●
Labels
The lens area of the integral
indicator will accept a label
0.750 x 0.450 and 0.010 in
(19.05 x 11.43 x 0.25 mm)
thick. Our selection of
standard labels with white
legends on black polycarbonate background can
be found on Page V11-T2-74.
Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.
●
2
2
Additional colors of rockers
and mounting bezels are
available
●
Special circuits
●
Special ratings
●
Dry circuit capabilities
●
Pad-printed legends on
lens, rocker and bezel
●
Special indicator legend
labels
●
Special LEDs and LED
voltages
●
Special actuators
●
Reversing jumpers
●
Solder terminals and other
terminal types
●
Wire leads
●
Polarized lock-on
connector: 28-5558
●
Full-size Euro-Look panel
plugs: 17-19544-2
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada: File 2702
RoHS Compliant 1
2
2
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
2
V11-T2-72
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.11
Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT
ESPORT Full-Size Rocker Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection
2
How To Order—ESPORT, Non-Illuminated
Example:
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
2PST
2PDT
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
5-6
OFF
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-3, 5-6
OFF
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
NONE
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
8064K10
DOWN
Position
OFF
5-4
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
OFF
2-1, 5-4 1
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
Base
Circuit
Number
8064K10
8064K11
8064K14
8064K12
8064K17
8064K16
8064K20
8064K21
8064K24
8064K22
8064K27
8064K26
L
R
Z
1 W
2
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Rocker Style
S = 1 in paddle
L = 1.5 in paddle
B = Rocker
2
Rocker
LED Color
Z = None
Rocker Color
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Gray
LED Voltage
1 = 14 Vdc
2 = 28 Vdc
Indicator
LED Color
R = Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green
Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 = White 2
1PST
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
5-6
NONE
2
2
2
2
Example:
Rating
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
2
2
How To Order—ESPORT, Illuminated
Poles
and
Throw
2
8065K10
DOWN
Position
OFF
Base
Circuit
Number
8065K10
S
R
Y
1 W
2
2
2
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Rocker Style
B = Rocker
S = 1 in paddle
Indicator
LED Color
R = Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green
Rocker
LED Color
R = Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green
Rocker Color
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Gray
LED Voltage
1 = 14 Vdc
2 = 28 Vdc
Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 = White 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Momentary contact.
2 White lenses are furnished unassembled.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-73
2.11
2
2
2
2
8064/8065—ESPORT
Description
Specification
Ratings
15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT
Maintained and momentary action
Movable—Silver-plated copper with silver contact face button
Stationary—Copper with silver contact face button
Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
Switch—Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass
Integral indicator—0.110 x 0.032 in (2.79 x 0.813 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass
Thermoset molding material
1000V rms, minimum
Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
Circuits
Contact material
Mechanical life
2
Terminal types
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8064/8065—ESPORT
Technical Data and Specifications
2
2
Rockers
Base material
Dielectric
Mounting means
Icon/Legend Selection
●
●
●
All labels below come with adhesive backing
Label legends are distinct and easily readable when illuminated from behind
Additional labels are available upon request. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative
Icons and Legends
Legend
Ordering
Code 1
Style
Dome
Light
Work
Light
0055
0056
TV/VCR
0065
Fridge
0066
Cruise
ON/OFF
Brake
Select
Brake
ON/OFF
Fan
Override
Cruise Set
Engine
Brake
Left
Window
Power
Mirror
Right
Window
0067
Icon
Description
Ordering
Code 1
Windshield Wiper
SAE Specification No. J1362-0086
White graphic on a black background
0057
Windshield Washer
SAE Specification No. J1362-0087
White graphic on a black background
0986
Master Lighting Switch
SAE Specification No. J1362-5012
White graphic on a black background
0687
Fog Lights
SAE Specification No. J1362-0633
White graphic on a black background
0684
Clearance/Position Light
SAE Specification No. J1362-0456
White graphics on a black background
0686
0068
Helvetica Narrow
0.135 in (3.43 mm) high
White translucent letters
Opaque black background
0069
0071
0681
0682
0683
0688
0689
Note
1 Ordering Code: If a standard label is required, add the Ordering Code to the end of ESPORT Switch part number preceded
by a dash. Example: To order 8065K10BYR1B1 with the 0684 Fog Lights label, the part number will be 8065K10BYR1B1-0684.
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-74
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.11
Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
2
2
0.434 ± 0.029
(11.02 ± 0.76)
2
3
2
1
+7
USA
6
5
4
1.598 ± 0.029
(40.59 ± 0.76)
-8
4
5
6
-8
0.110 (2.79)
0.004 (0.11) Thick
1
+7
2
See Detail A for
Label Dimensions
0.030 ± 0.010
(0.76 ± 0.25)
0.250 (6.35)
0.010 (0.25) Thick
2
1.064 ± 0.012
(27.03 ± 0.31)
R 0.156 ± 0.127
(R 3.96 ± 3.23)
2
2
1.598 ± 0.030
(40.59 ± 0.76)
Location of LED
when Illuminated
2 PDT—Non-Illuminated
Bottom View
3
2
0.100 ± 0.010
(2.54 ± 0.25)
2
5
4
2
0.750 ± 0.008
(19.05 ± 0.20)
USA
6
Panel
Opening
0.450 ± 0.006
(11.43 ± 0.15)
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.060 to 0.150 (1.52 to 3.81)
2
2
-8
1 PST—Illuminated
Bottom View
2
2
1.970 ± 0.012
(50.04 ± 0.31)
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
2
Label Dimensions
Detail A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-75
2.12
2
2
2
Rockers
Accessories
Dimensions for NGR, EURO SR, Full Size Euro-Look and ESPORT Rocker Accessories
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
NGR Connector
Euro/SR and Full Size Euro-Look Connector
0.962 ± 0.029
(24.38 ± 0.76)
2.180 (55.37)
1.815 ± 0.059
(45.97 ± 1.52)
2
0.910
(23.11)
2
0.812
(20.62)
8
6
5B
0.954 ± 0.005
(24.13 ± 0.13)
2
4
7
2
5A
2
1.877 ± 0.059
(47.50 ± 1.52)
1.335 ± 0.005
(33.78 ± 0.13)
1.255
(31.88)
1.400
(35.56)
2
2
2
2
NGR Connector Catalog Number
28-5637-2 accepts Packard
12015870 Metri-Pack terminals
or AMP compatible connector
28-5940 accepts AMP
terminals 42100-2.
0.812
(20.62)
0.698
(17.73)
0.976
(24.79)
2
2
2
1.400
(35.56)
2
Euro-Look and EURO/SR
Connector Catalog Number
28-3426 accepts Packard
12015870 Metri-Pack
terminals.
2
2
2
ESPORT Connector
2
2
2
Retaining hinge functions to keep parts intact
through shipment and handling. Fracture
of the hinges does not affect form, fit or function
of the connector and its terminal retention
features.
Dimension Applies at
Base of Snap Leg
2
2
3
6
2
2
5
1.697 ± 0.020
(43.10 ± 0.51)
1
2
2
2
ESPORT Connector
Catalog Number 28-5558
Locations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 accept
1.701 ± 0.020
Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals.
(43.21 ± 0.51)
Locations 7 and 8 accept Packard
4
12034046 Metri-Pack terminals.
8
7
0.910 ± 0.020
(23.11 ± 0.51)
1.392 ± 0.014
(35.36 ± 0.38)
2.180 ± 0.020
(55.37 ± 0.51)
2
2
V11-T2-76
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2.12
Rockers
Accessories
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Gang Mounting System
1.030
(26.16)
R 0.125
(R 3.18)
2.060 (52.32)
2
0.867
(22.02)
2
2
1.734
(44.02)
End
Bezel
1.897
(48.18)
2
2.000
(50.8)
2.280
(57.91)
(2) End Bezels
(2) End Bezels and (1) Center Bezel
2.026 + 0.010
(51.46 + 0.25/– 0.000)
3.056 + 0.010
(77.62 + 0.51/– 0.000)
2
R 0.187 (R 4.75)
R 0.165 (R 4.19)
0.661
(16.79)
NGR, Euro-Look and ESPORT Panel Plugs
C
17-21159
17-19264
17-19263
0.847
(21.51)
1.009
(25.63)
Euro-Look
ESPORT
NGR
A
0.080 (2.03)
0.100 (2.54)
B
R 0.060 (R 1.52)
R 0.080 (R 2.03)
C
0.340 (8.64)
0.335 (8.51)
D
0.530 (13.46)
0.550 (13.97)
E
R 0.156 (R 3.96)
R 0.250 (R 6.35)
E
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190
(0.76 to 4.83)
Panel plug Catalog Number
17-19544-2 for Use with
Euro-Look and ESPORT.
NGR panel plug Catalog
Number 17-21543.
2
1.024
(26.01)
Part will also fit Eaton
gang mounting boxes.
Catalog Numbers
17-19263 and
17-19264
0.867 + 0.005/– 0.000
(22.02 + 0.13/– 0.00)
2
R 0.156
(R 3.96)
2
2
0.650 +0.010/ –0.001
(16.51 +0.25/ –0.02)
0.985 ± 0.007
(25.02 ± 0.20)
2
2
2
2
0.130 ± 0.010
(3.30 ± 0.25)
1.450
(36.83)
1.190
(30.23)
Panel
Opening
2
2
1.735 ± 0.012
(44.07 ± 0.31)
1.427 ± 0.005
(36.25 ± 0.13)
1.734 + 0.005/– 0.000
(44.04 + 0.13/– 0.00)
2
0.494
(12.55)
Tolerence: +0.254/−0.000 (+ 0.254/–0.000) for Each
Center Bezel up to a Maximum of + 0.0002 (+ 0.050)
Top
View
2
2
D
1.380
(35.05)
1.970
(50.04)
17-21160
Euro-Look
1.255 + 0.009/ –0.001
(31.88 +0.25/ –0.03)
A
Bottom
View
NGR
EURO SR Panel Plugs
B
1.530
(38.86)
Center
Dimensions: 2.026 + 0.254/−0.00 (51.46 + 0.254/–0.000)
Plus Number of Center Bezels Times 1.03
2
1.200
(30.48)
End
1.900 ± 0.020
(48.26 + 0.51/– 0.00)
Panel Opening—Reference Only
Thickness: 0.039 to 0.078 to 0.118
(1.00 to 2.00 to 3.00)
2
0.150
(3.81)
Bezel Catalog Numbers
Panel Opening
for 2 End Bezels
1.900 ± 0.020
(48.26 + 0.51/– 0.00)
2
2
2
0.820 ± 0.005
(20.83 ± 0.13)
2
Panel Opening—Reference Only
Thickness:
0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17)
2
2
2
0.680 0.830
(16.66) (21.08)
2
2
Panel Plug Catalog Number 53-3318
For Use with EURO/SR
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-77
2.13
2
2
SinglePole
Rockers
Technical Data
1
2
3
2
2
2
TwoPole
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
2
2
FourPole
7
8
9
10
11
12
Terminal Identification
Circuit Diagrams
When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.
Rocker Circuit Diagrams
All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.
2
2
2
2
2
“Three Independent” ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram
Connection Points
Connect common to terminals
2
2
Connect circuit “A” to terminals
6
Connect circuit “B” to terminals
4
Connect circuit “C” to terminals
1
2
2
UP
Position
No. of
Poles
Circuit A
2
2
B
1PDT
C
2PST
2
3
D
2PDT
1
2
3
E
4PST 1
1 PDT
2
1
Schematic
I
2 Circuit 5
1
4
3
6
2
4
1
3
J
1PST
1
2
3
K
1PDT
5
6
L
2PST
4
5
6
2 5 8 11
3 6 9 12
7 10
8 11
9 12
1 4
2 5
3 6
Single-Pole
G3
1PST
4
M
2PST
2 4
1 3
6
N
2PDT
P
1PDT
2
6
3
Circuit with Lever in …
3 ON
Independent
Circuit Letter
2
3
F
4PDT 2
ON-ON-ON Special Circuit
Schematic
A
1PST
For switch modified with “Three Independent” ON-ON-ON
special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect
wiring per instructions given below.
2
2
Circuit Letter
CENTER
Position
(Maintained)
Circuit B
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
H4
1PDT
4
2
3
Q7
2 Circuit
6
B
A
C
C
NC NO
H
G
NC
NO
Circuit C
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
Legends
Rocker Switch Legend
Legend
Rocker Switch Type
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever
2
Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever
2
Center terminal and switch lever
2
Momentary contact
Bulb
Denotes mechanical contact portion
2
See next page for Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams. See Page V11-T2-17
for NGR Circuit Diagrams.
2
Notes
1
Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2
Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3
Dependent lamp.
4
Independent lamp.
5
Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being
controlled may be independent of each other.
6
For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7
Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-78
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Technical Data
2.13
Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams 1
Non-Illuminated
Circuit
Number
(Circuit
Designator)
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
CENTER
Position
Position
UP
Position
Schematic
1
1PST
OFF
2
NONE
ON
Circuit
Number
(Circuit
Designator)
18
1PST
1
2
1PST
OFF
12
11
3
1PST
NONE
OFF
2
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
1
4
1PST
OFF
2
1
5
1PDT
NONE
ON
3
ON
NONE
3
ON
2
OFF
MOM. ON
2
NONE
ON
1
ON
2
3
OFF
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
2
3
OFF
MOM. ON
1
11
2PST
12
2PST
13
2PDT
12
25
11
24
12
25
11
24
12
25
11
24
12 13 25 26
11
14
2PDT
13 12 26 25
16
2PDT
13 12 26 25
11
17
2PDT
11
OFF
NONE
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
2
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
2
MOM. OFF
NONE
ON
ON
NONE
ON
ON
OFF
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
NONE
ON
ON
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
ON
—
—
—
2
2
25 26
3
1
2
2
12
11
2
13
23
1PDT
25 26
24 13
24
1PDT
26
25
25
1PDT
2
2
2
26 25
26
1PDT
26
13 24
27
2PST
OFF
NONE
ON
28
2PST
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
29
2PST 3
MOM. OFF
NONE
ON
30
2PDT
ON
31
2PDT
25
2
NONE
2
26 25
13 24
12
25
12
2
2
24
25
12
11
24
13 26
11
ON
2
2
11
ON
OFF
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
ON
ON
OFF
MOM. ON
24
25
2
25
11
24
32
Indicator
2
2
24
12
2
2
3 2
2
Notes
1 Terminal numbers 1, 2 and 3 denote single-pole base.
Terminal numbers 11, 12, 113, 24, 25 and 26 denote two-pole base.
2
Single-pole in two-pole base with lamp independently wired.
3
Two-pole—independently wired lamp.
2
2
2
24
12 26
13
11
21
1PST
2
ON
24
12
2
NONE
2
12
11
2
OFF
24
15
2PDT
11
3
1
24
13 12 26 25
11
Schematic
13 24
1
10
2PST
UP
Position
13 24
3
9
1PDT
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
CENTER
Position
Position
ON
1
8
1PDT
20
1PST 2
ON
1
7
1PDT
19
1PST
22
1PDT
2
6
1PDT
2
Illuminated
25
MOM. ON
OFF
2
MOM. ON
2
24
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-79
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
AA
AQ
BF
BU
AB
AR
BG
BV
AC
AS
BH
BW
AD
AT
BI
BX
AE
AU
BJ
BY
AF
AV
BK
BZ
AG
AW
BL
CA
AH
AX
BM
CB
AJ
AY
BN
CC
AK
BA
BP
CD
AL
BB
BQ
CE
AM
BC
BR
CF
AN
BD
BS
CG
AP
BE
BT
CH
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-80
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
CI
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
CX
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
DN
Catalog
Number Suffix
EC
2
2
2
CJ
CY
DP
2
ED
2
CK
DA
DQ
2
EE
2
CL
DB
DR
2
EF
2
CM
DC
DS
2
EG
2
CN
DD
DT
2
EH
2
CP
DE
DU
2
EI
2
CQ
DF
DV
2
EJ
2
CR
DG
DW
2
EK
2
CS
DH
DX
EL
CT
DJ
DY
EM
CU
DK
DZ
EN
CV
DL
EA
EO
CW
DM
EB
EP
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-81
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
EQ
FE
FS
GG
ER
FF
FT
GH
ES
FG
FU
GI
ET
FH
FV
GJ
EU
FI
FW
GK
EV
FJ
FX
GL
EW
FK
FY
GM
EX
FL
FZ
GN
EY
FM
GA
GP
EZ
FN
GB
GQ
FA
FO
GC
GR
FB
FP
GD
GS
FC
FQ
GE
GT
FD
FR
GF
GU
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-82
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
GV
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
HM
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
JD
Catalog
Number Suffix
JT
2
2
2
GW
HN
JE
2
JU
2
GY
HP
JF
2
JV
2
HA
HQ
JG
2
JW
2
HB
HR
JH
2
JX
2
HC
HS
JJ
2
JY
2
HD
HT
JK
2
JZ
2
HE
HU
JL
2
KA
2
HF
HV
JM
2
KB
2
LUZ
HG
HW
JN
KC
HH
HY
JP
KD
HJ
JA
JQ
KE
HK
JB
JR
KF
HL
JC
JS
KG
2
2
PASILLO
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-83
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
KV
KH
2
Catalog
Number Suffix
LJ
EXIT
2
KI
KW
KJ
KX
2
2
EXH
BRK
LK
LL
24V.
CHARGER
2
2
KK
KY
KL
KZ
KM
LA
KN
LB
LP
LC
LQ
LD
LR
KQ
LE
LS
KR
LF
LT
2
2
2
2
2
2
AQUA
HOT
HEAT
EXCHGR
AIR
COMPSR
LM
LN
LO
DIAG
2
2
KO
2
2
KP
2
2
CRUISE
SELECT
TEST
ALARMS
2
2
PA
2
AUX HYD
OVERHEAT
2
KT
2
LH
VIDEO
2
KU
2
LI
ENTER
2
2
LG
KS
2
1
2
G-AUX
START
CNTR
A/C
REAR
A/C
LU
LV
LW
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-84
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
LX
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
ML
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
NB
Catalog
Number Suffix
NP
LY
MM
NC
2
NQ
2
CODE
LZ
MN
ND
2
NR
POSITION
2
LIGHT
UPPER
WARN
LOWER
WARN
COMPT
LIGHTS
WORK
LIGHTS
FAST
IDLE
MIRROR
HEAT
GEN
PTO
MA
MO
NE
2
NS
2
MB
MP
NF
2
NT
2
MC
MS
NG
2
NU
2
MD
MT
NH
2
NV
2
ME
MU
NI
2
NW
2
MF
MV
NJ
2
NX
2
MG
MW
NK
NY
MH
MX
NL
NZ
MI
MY
NM
PA
MJ
MZ
NN
PB
MK
NA
NO
PC
2
2
2
2
2
WIGWAG
SIREN
BRAKE
LEFT
SCENE
1
2
2
2
DIAG
MASTER
WARN
2
2
2
2
2
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-85
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
PD
PS
PE
PT
PF
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
RG
RW
RH
RX
PU
RI
RY
PG
PV
RJ
RZ
PH
PW
RK
SA
PI
PX
RL
SB
2
2
2
2
CHECK
ENGINE
2
2
2
2
2
2
D
2
2
PY
PJ
RM
SC
H
2
2
PK
PZ
RN
SD
PL
RA
RP
SE
PM
RB
RQ
SF
PN
RC
RS
SG
PP
RD
RT
SH
RE
RU
SJ
RF
RV
SK
2
2
ABS
CODE
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
PQ
2
2
PR
2
OVER
LOAD
DRIVE
AXLE
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-86
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
SL
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
TA
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
TQ
Catalog
Number Suffix
UE
2
2
2
SM
TB
TR
2
UF
2
SN
TC
TS
2
UG
Mode
2
SP
TD
TT
2
UH
2
SQ
TE
TU
2
UK
2
SR
TF
TV
2
UL
2
SS
TG
TW
2
UM
2
ST
TH
TX
2
UN
2
SU
TJ
TY
2
UP
2
SV
TK
TZ
UR
SW
TL
UA
US
SX
TM
UB
UT
SY
TN
UC
UU
SZ
TP
UD
UV
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-87
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
UW
VM
WC
WT
UX
VN
WD
WU
UY
VP
WE
WV
UZ
VR
WF
WW
VA
VS
WG
WX
VB
VT
WH
WY
VC
VU
WJ
WZ
VD
VV
WK
XA
VE
VW
WL
XB
VF
VX
WM
XC
VG
VY
WN
XD
VH
VZ
WP
XE
VK
WA
WR
XF
VL
WB
WS
XG
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-88
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
XH
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
XY
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
YN
Catalog
Number Suffix
ZC
2
2
2
XJ
XZ
YP
2
ZD
2
XK
YA
YQ
2
ZE
2
XL
YB
YR
2
ZF
2
XM
YC
YS
2
ZG
2
XN
YD
YT
2
ZH
2
XP
YE
YU
2
ZJ
2
XR
YF
YV
2
ZK
2
XS
YG
YW
2
ZL
2
XT
YH
YX
ZM
XU
YJ
YY
ZN
XV
YK
YZ
ZP
XW
YL
ZA
ZR
XX
YM
ZB
ZS
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-89
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
ZT
H1
Y1
N2
ZU
J1
Z1
P2
ZV
K1
A2
R2
ZW
L1
B2
S2
ZX
M1
C2
T2
ZY
N1
D2
U2
ZZ
P1
E2
V2
A1
R1
F2
W2
B1
S1
G2
X2
C1
T1
H2
Y2
D1
U1
J2
Z2
E1
V1
K2
A3
F1
W1
L2
B3
G1
X1
M2
C3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-90
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
D3
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
T3
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
H4
Catalog
Number Suffix
Y4
2
2
2
E3
U3
J4
2
Z4
2
F3
V3
K4
2
A5
2
G3
W3
L4
2
B5
2
H3
X3
M4
2
C5
2
J3
Y3
N4
2
D5
2
K3
Z3
P4
2
E5
2
L3
A4
R4
2
F5
2
M3
B4
S4
2
G5
2
N3
C4
T4
H5
P3
D4
U4
J5
Q3
E4
V4
K5
R3
F4
W4
L5
S3
G4
X4
M5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-91
2.14
2
2
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
N5
C6
S6
G7
P5
D6D6
T6
H7
Q5
E6
U6
J7
R5
F6
V6
K7
S5
G6
W6
L7
T5
H6
X6
M7
U5
J6
Y6
N7
V5
K6
Z6
P7
W5
L6
A7
Q7
X5
M6
B7
R7
Y5
N6
C7
S7
Z5
P6
D7
T7
A6
Q6
E7
U7
B6
R6
F7
V7
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-92
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
W7
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
L8
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
A9
Catalog
Number Suffix
Q9
2
2
2
X7
M8
B9
2
R9
2
Y7
N8
C9
2
S9
2
Z7
P8
D9
2
T9
2
A8
Q8
E9
2
U9
2
B8
R8
F9
2
V9
2
C8
S8
G9
2
W9
2
D8
T8
H9
2
X9
2
E8
U8
J9
2
Y9
2
F8
V8
K9
Z9
G8
W8
L9
1A
H8
X8
M9
1B
J8
Y8
N9
1C
K8
Z8
P9
1D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T2-93
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
NGR Only Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
1E
1L
1S
1Y
1F
1M
1T
1Z
1G
1N
1U
2A
1H
1P
1V
2B
1J
1Q
1W
2C
1K
1R
1X
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-94
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
MM
LX
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
NB
Catalog
Number Suffix
NR
MN
LY
NC
2
NS
SHDN
OVRD
HI
RPM
LOW
RPM
2
MP
MA
ND
2
NT
EXHST
BRK
MB
2
2
SET/CST
2
2
2
MQ
NE
2
NU
2
MC
MR
NF
2
NV
2
MS
MD
NG
2
NW
2
TEST
MT
ME
NH
2
NX
2
P
MU
MF
P
MG
MH
MV
NJ
F
N
MW
2
NY
2
NK
2
NZ
2
NL
O3
2
AUX
WARN
2
MI
MX
NM
PA
MJ
MY
NN
PB
MK
MZ
NP
PC
ML
NA
NQ
PD
2
2
2
2
OVER
LOAD
2
2
2
RSM/ACC
1
2
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-95
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
PT
QH
QX
PF
PU
QJ
QY
PG
PV
QK
PH
PW
QL
PI
PX
QM
PE
2
AUTO
2
2
2
2
AUTO
2
2
2
2
SET
ACCEL
RESUME
DECEL
QZ
RA
RB
CTIS
2
PJ
PY
QN
RC
PK
PZ
QP
RD
2
2
WINCH
2
2
QA
PL
QQ
RE
CRANE
2
2
QB
QR
QC
QS
QD
QT
RH
PQ
QE
QU
RJ
PR
QF
QV
RK
PS
QG
QW
RL
PM
2
AUTO
2
PN
AUTO
2
n/min
2
PP
AUTO
MODE
MAN
MODE
RF
RG
AUTO
2
n/min
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-96
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
SB
RM
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
SR
Catalog
Number Suffix
TF
2
2
2
SC
RN
SS
2
TG
2
SD
RP
ST
2
TH
2
RQ
SE
SU
2
TJ
2
RR
SF
SG
RS
SV
RPM
CTRL
SW
2
TK
2
2
TL
2
SH
RT
SX
2
TM
2
SJ
RU
SY
2
TN
2
ENG
DIAG
RV
SK
SZ
2
TP
2
RW
SL
TA
RX
SM
TB
TR
RY
SN
TC
TS
RZ
SP
TD
TT
SA
SQ
TE
TU
2
TQ
2
2
CHEM
ALARM
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-97
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
TV
UK
UZ
VP
TW
UL
VA
VQ
TX
UM
VB
VR
TY
UN
VC
VS
TZ
UP
VD
UA
UQ
VE
VU
UB
UR
VF
VV
UC
US
VG
VW
UD
UT
VH
VX
UU
VJ
VY
UV
VK
VZ
UG
UW
VL
WA
UH
UX
VM
WB
UY
VN
WC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
FAULT
2
VT
OK
2
2
2
P
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
UE
F
2
2
UF
LH
2
2
2
AUTO
2
2
UJ
2
RH
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-98
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
WD
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
WT
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
XJ
Catalog
Number Suffix
YA
2
2
2
WE
WU
XL
2
YB
2
WF
WV
XM
2
YC
2
WG
WX
XN
2
YD
2
SET/RES
WH
WY
XP
2
YE
2
WJ
WZ
XQ
2
YF
2
WK
XA
XR
2
YG
2
WL
XB
XS
2
YH
2
WM
XC
XT
2
YJ
2
WN
XD
XU
YK
WP
XE
XV
YL
WQ
XF
XW
YM
WR
XG
XY
YN
WS
XH
XZ
YP
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-99
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
YQ
ZE
ZV
K1
YR
ZF
ZW
L1
YS
ZG
ZX
M1
YT
ZH
ZY
N1
YU
ZJ
ZZ
P1
YV
ZK
A1
R1
YW
ZL
B1
S1
YX
ZM
C1
T1
YY
ZN
D1
U1
YZ
ZP
E1
V1
ZA
ZR
F1
W1
G1
X1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
RPM
2
2
ZB
ZS
ZC
ZT
H1
Y1
ZD
ZU
J1
Z1
RPM
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-100
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Rockers
Symbols Library
2.14
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
A2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
R2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
G3
Catalog
Number Suffix
U3
2
2
2
B2
S2
H3
2
V3
2
C2
T2
I3
W3
2
2
D2
U2
J3
2
X3
2
E2
V2
K3
2
Y3
2
F2
W2
L3
2
Z3
2
G2
X2
M3
2
A4
2
H2
Y2
N3
2
B4
2
J2
Z2
O3
2
C4
2
K2
A3
P3
D4
L2
B3
Q3
E4
M2
C3
R3
F4
N2
D3
S3
G4
P2
F3
T3
H4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
2
V11-T2-101
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
2
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
I4
P4
V4
B5
J4
Q4
W4
C5
K4
R4
X4
D5
L4
S4
Y4
X5
M4
T4
Z4
X6
N4
U4
A5
X7
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
O4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.
V11-T2-102
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Special Devices
High Capacity Switch
3.1
High Capacity Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
3.3
Keylock
V11-T3-2
V11-T3-2
V11-T3-2
V11-T3-3
V11-T3-3
V11-T3-4
V11-T3-4
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
V11-T3-2
Panelboard Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Board Switch
V11-T3-2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V11-T3-5
V11-T3-5
V11-T3-6
V11-T3-7
V11-T3-7
V11-T3-8
Locking Rocker
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
V11-T3-9
V11-T3-9
V11-T3-9
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Locking Rocker
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T3-1
3.1
3
Special Devices
High Capacity Switches
Contents
High Capacity Switch
Description
3
High Capacity Switches
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Description
Technical Data and Specifications
The heavy duty high capacity
switch, Catalog Number
7818K1 is ideal for
exceptionally high-power
applications, for heavy-duty
motor loads and for use in
welding equipment or similar
industrial applications.
High Capacity Switches
By combining innovative
design and quality materials,
this switch is designed to
carry the specified maximum
inrush current for 10
milliseconds for a minimum
of 20,000 ON/OFF cycles.
Terminal types
Screw—brass (Catalog Number 11-6074-4) supplied. Furnish unassembled
Mounting means
Molded flush mounting bracket, high impact polycarbonate, 3.312 in (84.12 mm),
center-to-center spacing and 2.375 in (60.33 mm) spacing for self-tapping screws
Lever
Nylon
Standards and
Certifications
Dimensions
●
UL® to Standard 508,
File E147754
Description
Specification
Circuits
2PST, maintained
Contact mechanism
Quick-make/quick-break snap acting butt contact
Make: 200A peak inrush at 125 Vac for 10 ms for 20,000 cycles minimum
Break: 20A at 125 Vac for 20,000 cycles minimum
Contact material
10% silver cadmium oxide composite
Base
Molded thermoset material
Dielectric withstand
2200V rms minimum
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7818K1
3
3
3
3.812 (96.82)
3.281 (83.34) Mtg.
Product Selection
3
2.250 (57.15)
Max.
3
3
3
0.781
(19.84)
1.250
(31.75)
3
3
1.406 (35.71)
Max.
High Capacity Switch
Description
Catalog Number
40A, 600 Vac
5 hp, 250 Vac
7818K1
V11-T3-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Special Devices
Panelboard Switches
3.2
Contents
Panel Board Switches
Description
Panelboard Switches
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Page
3
V11-T3-4
V11-T3-4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Description
This group of two-position
power toggle switches is
used by manufacturers in a
wide variety of applications
that require dependability
and long service, such as
welding equipment,
commercial floor polishers,
battery chargers, food
processors and panelboards.
3
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
3
UL Recognized
CSA® Certified as noted
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T3-3
3.2
Special Devices
Panelboard Switches
3
Product Selection
3
8980K1
Panelboard Switches
Poles
and Throw
Mounting
Terminals
Catalog Number
60A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 125–250 Vac/Vdc 1
2PST
N/A
N/A
8980K1 2
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
30A, 125V “T”
2 hp, 120–240 Vac
1P double break
Frame plate
Center bus
8980K2
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
20A, 600 Vac
2 hp, 120–600 Vac
2PST
Panel type strap
Screw
8980K5
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
20A, 600 Vac
2 hp, 120–600 Vac
Three-phase
3PST
Panel type
Screw
8980K6
3
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 120–240 Vac
1 hp, 480 Vac
2PST
Panel type strap
Screw
8980K14 3
3
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 120–240 Vac
2PST
Panel type strap
Screw
8980K16
Rating
3
3
3
3
8980K5
3
3
3
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
Panelboard Switches
Description
Specification
3
Rating
10–60A; 120–600V
See Product Selection table
3
Circuits
1PST, 2PST, 3PST 2 circuit, maintained
Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, momentary
3
Contact mechanism
Quick-make/quick-break wiping action
Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, quick-make/quick-break butt contact
3
Contact material
Movable—bronze; stationary—copper; Catalog Number 8980K13—silver
Terminal types
Screw or bus
3
Termination material
Copper
Mounting means
Two-hole mounting—panel type flush
3
Dielectric withstand
1000 volts rms minimum
Operating temperature range
0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
3
3
Notes
1 For appliance use only; 32A, 480 Vac, 25A, 600 Vac.
2 CSA Certified.
3 Binding screws assembled. For binding screws provided unassembled, order Catalog Number 8980K30.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V11-T3-4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
3.3
Contents
General Purpose and Heavy Duty Keylocks
Description
Page
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy
Duty—AC/DC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T3-6
V11-T3-7
V11-T3-7
V11-T3-8
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Description
Features
General Purpose
Termination Types
Mounting Means
General Purpose
Solder lugs—Brass silverplated
General Purpose
Threaded bushing—0.468 in
(11.89 mm) dia.
Heavy Duty
●
7842 Series
Screw terminals—Brass
designed to accept #7-32 x
3/16 binding head screws
Keyway—0.062–0.067 in
wide x 0.035–0.370 deep
(1.55–1.70 mm wide x
0.89–0.94 mm deep
These keylock switches
provide reliable performance
in a space-saving design.
They all use quick-make/
quick-break switching
mechanisms, with wiping
action blades for self-cleaning
contacts.
Heavy Duty
These switches have a slowmake/slow-break switching
mechanism with large butt
type contacts. Their high
current switching capability
allows them to be used for
locking switching circuits in
power applications.
Furnished unassembled
7846 Series
Quick connect terminals—
Brass
●
Hardware supplied—
1 hexnut (Cat. No. 15-192)
and 1 chamfered dress nut
(Cat. No. 15-994-2)
Furnished unassembled
3
Heavy Duty
●
7842 Series
Slotted bushing—0.468 in
(11.89 mm) dia.
Hardware supplied—
4 terminal screws and
1 hexnut
Furnished unassembled
7846 Series
Hardware supplied—
2 hexnuts
●
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T3-5
3.3
3
Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Product Selection
General Purpose Keylock AC/DC Switches
3
Circuit with Key in … (Keyway Down)
CENTER
Position
RIGHT
LEFT
(Keyway)
Position
Position
Key
Removal
Position
Solder Lug Terminal
Catalog Number
3
Rating
3
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vac/Vdc
1PST
—
—
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
CENTER
CENTER and RIGHT
8928K492
8928K493
3
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1A, 250 Vac/Vdc
1PDT
—
ON
ON
CENTER and RIGHT
8928K494
3
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1-1/2A, 250 Vdc
1PDT
—
ON
ON
CENTER
8283K150
3
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vdc
2PST
—
—
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
CENTER
CENTER
8370K150
8370K151
3
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2PST
—
OFF
ON
CENTER and RIGHT
8928K495
3
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vdc
2PDT
—
—
ON
ON
ON
ON
CENTER
CENTER and RIGHT
8373K150
8373K151
3
Poles and
Throw
Heavy Duty Keylock AC Rated Switches
3
Rating
3
Circuit
Action
Key Removal Slotted Bushing Length
Position
Inches
mm
Type of
Termination
Key Style
Catalog
Number
2PST
OFF-ON-OFF-ON
OFF
Quick Connect
E (13-8173)
7846K1 1
7846 Type Series
20A, 120 Vac
20A, 240 Vac
1-1/2 hp, 120 Vac
2 hp, 240 Vac
3
3
0.50
12.7
Note
1 Not CSA Certified.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V11-T3-6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
3.3
Accessories
Keys for Locking Switches
Additional keys may be
ordered from the Key
Selection table.
Where Used
13-8171
Key styles shown match
those listed for specific
switches in the Product
Selection tables.
3
Key Selection
13-5496
13-8173
3
Catalog
Number
General purpose and heavy
duty series
13-5496
3
Security locking bracket
13-8171
3
7846K1
13-8173
3
3
3
Rotary Keylock Brackets—
Security Tumbler Type
Key Selection
This series of rotary keylock
is designed for use in security
applications. They provide a
simple method of converting
single- and two-pole toggle
switches. For use with twoor three-position switches.
Where Used
3
Catalog
Number
Key removable in counterclockwise position
3
8980P25
3
Key removable in clockwise 8980P27
position
Key removable in either
extreme position
3
8980P28
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Description
General Purpose
Heavy Duty
3
Circuits
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT
Maintained action
2PST, 2-circuit
maintained
3
3
Contact mechanism
Quick-make/quick-break wiping action
Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
Contact material
Movable—Bronze silver-plated
Stationary—Brass silver-plated
Movable—Silver cadmium oxide
Stationary—Silver cadmium oxide
3
3
Rotary Keylock Brackets
Description
Specification
Bushing
7/8 in dia., 24 threads/inch
3
3
Mounting hardware and keys
1 hexagon locknut
Cat. No. 15-2528-2
1 bright chrome plated dress nut
Cat. No. 15-2528-2 (furnished unassembled)
2 keys
Cat. No. 13-8171
3
Lock bushing
Diecast zinc
Lock barrel and dress nut
Chrome plated brass
3
Keys
Brass
3
Finish
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T3-7
3.3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8928K493—1PST/1PDT
8373K151—2PST/2PDT
0.196
(4.97)
0.198 (5.03)
0.200 (5.08)
0.516
(13.11)
0.196
(4.97)
0.198 (5.03)
0.200 (5.08)
0.516
(13.11)
18°
18°
18°
0.471 (11.96)
Dia.
0.473 (12.01)
0.056 (1.42)
0.068 (1.73)
0.056 (1.42)
0.068 (1.73)
Mtg. Hole
3
3
Special Devices
15/32−32 Thds.
Mtg. Hole
Key Removable in
Both Positions
0.061 (1.55)
0.063 (1.60)
3
0.545
(13.84)
0.841
(21.36)
3
3
1.375
(34.92)
0.687
(17.45)
1.080
(27.43)
0.750
(19.05)
0.960
(24.38)
1.080
(27.43)
3
Key Removable in
Both Positions
15/32−32 Thds.
0.490
(12.45)
3
18°
0.471 (11.96)
Dia.
0.473 (12.01)
0.010
(0.25)
0.220
(5.59)
0.823
(20.90)
0.735
(18.67)
0.175
(4.44)
3
3
7842K2—2PST
3
3
3
3
3
7846K1—2PST
Keyway 0.065 W x 0.032−0.035 D
(1.65 W x 0.81−0.89 D)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.044−0.046 D
(2.03–2.16 W x 1.12–1.17 D)
15/32−32 TPT
0.718
(18.24)
0.953
(24.21)
0.750
(19.05)
1.032
(26.21)
0.343
(8.71)
3
1.171
(29.74)
1.312
(33.32)
3
3
3
3
3
1.296
(32.92)
3
0.906
(23.01)
3
3
3
V11-T3-8
7/8–24 T.P.I.
(22.23)
15/32−32 TPT
0.500
(12.70)
0.562
(14.27)
8980P27
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Special Devices
Locking Rockers
3.4
Contents
Locking Rockers
Description
Page
Locking Rockers
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Description
This unique switch features
a patented internal locking
mechanism, which allows the
switch to be locked in the
OFF position to prevent
unauthorized or accidental
operation. The key to locking
or unlocking the switch is a
removable paddle rocker cap,
which must be inserted in
order to move the switch to
the ON position. The switch
can still be turned OFF.
The locking rocker is ideally
suited for such markets
as portable tools, computers,
lawn and garden equipment,
marine and construction.
3
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
3
UL Recognized
CSA Certified
RoHS Compliant 1
3
3
Note: Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
selection information and
optional features.
Locking Rocker Switch
DOWN
Position
Poles and Throw
Base Circuit
(See Page
V11-T3-10)
Catalog
Number
3
3
Without Palm Guard Feature
3
1PST
ON
NONE
OFF
A
8166K27
1PDT
ON
NONE
ON
B
8166K28
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
C
8166K25
2PDT
ON
NONE
ON
D
8166K26
3
ON
NONE
OFF
A
8166K23
3
3
With Palm Guard Feature
20A, 125 Vac
20A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac
3
3
Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
20A, 125 Vac
20A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac
3
3
Product Selection
Rating 2
3
1PST
1PDT
ON
NONE
ON
B
8166K24
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
C
8166K21
2PDT
ON
NONE
ON
D
8166K22
3
3
Notes
1
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.
2
Ratings listed for 125 Vac also apply at 28 Vdc. Also supplied with a 20A, 277 Vac rating as standard.
3
3
3
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T3-9
3.4
Special Devices
Locking Rockers
3
Accessories
3
53-3021-2
Replacement Cap
3
Description
Catalog
Number
Red paddle rocker replacement cap
53-3021-2
3
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
Circuit Diagrams
3
Locking Rocker Switch
Locking Rocker Circuit Diagrams
Description
Specification
Circuit Letter
3
Contact
mechanism
Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on
AC and low voltage DC applications
3
A
1PST
Contact
material
Movable—Silver-plated copper w/cad-oxide contact face button
Stationary—Copper w/cad-oxide contact face button
3
3
3
3
3
3
Terminal types
0.25 in spade terminals are standard
Rocker
material
Custom styled, red thermoplastic rocker key with “REMOVE TO LOCK”
across the top of the key in raised letters
Dielectric
1000V rms minimum
Recommended
Panel Cutout
Dimensions
0.650
(16.51)
0.440 (11.18)
0.250
(6.35)
0.745
(18.92)
3
1.450
(36.83)
0.960
(24.38)
0.680 (17.27)
0.830 (21.08)
Locking Rocker Switch with Palm Guard
3
Recommended
Panel Cutout
Dimensions
0.960 (24.38)
0.744
(18.90)
0.225
(5.72)
0.650 (16.51)
1.700
(43.18)
1.190
(30.23)
1.080
(27.43)
3
3
1.190
(30.23)
1.700
(43.18)
1.080
(27.43)
3
3
1
2
3
Locking Rocker Switch without Palm Guard
3
3
B
1PDT
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
3
2
3
Dimensions
3
3
Schematic
0.250
(6.35)
3
0.440
(11.18)
1.450
(36.83)
0.745
(18.92)
0.960
(24.38)
0.680 (17.27)
0.830 (21.08)
3
3
V11-T3-10
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Circuit Letter
Schematic
C
2PST
2
3
D
2PDT
1
2
3
5
6
4
5
6
Toggle Switches
Military
4.1
Introduction
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2
Illuminated AC Rated
4.4
4.7
X Series Toggles
4.9
V11-T4-10
V11-T4-10
V11-T4-12
V11-T4-16
V11-T4-16
V11-T4-20
V11-T4-21
V11-T4-21
V11-T4-25
V11-T4-25
V11-T4-26
V11-T4-27
V11-T4-29
V11-T4-29
Accessories
Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T4-31
Decorator Facenuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T4-33
Panel Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T4-33
Replacement Terminal Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T4-33
Indicating Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T4-34
Technical Data
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-24
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8
V11-T4-9
X Series Toggles
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose AC/DC Rated
V11-T4-7
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6
V11-T4-6
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5
V11-T4-3
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
Military Purpose Toggles
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3
V11-T4-2
V11-T4-35
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-1
4.1
4
Toggle Switches
Introduction
Contents
Toggle Switches
Description
4
Military Purpose Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated. . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated. . . . . . . .
X Series Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Selection Guide
4
Toggle Switches
4
Military Purpose Toggles
Illuminated AC Rated Switches
General Purpose Toggles—
AC Rated
Product Selection
Page V11-T4-3
Page V11-T4-9
Page V11-T4-20
Circuit Diagram
Page V11-T4-35
—
Page V11-T4-35
Product Description
Eaton’s military purpose switches
are designed to meet the
requirements of MIL-S-83731
These illuminated switches
are available only in single-pole
circuitry. A two-pole base is utilized
with single-pole housing the lamp.
These AC rated toggle switches offer
the widest selection of features and the
design flexibility to meet a variety of
applications.
X Series Toggles
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
General Purpose Toggles—
AC/DC Rated
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Selection
Page V11-T4-20
Page V11-T4-24
Page V11-T4-27
Circuit Diagram
Page V11-T4-35
—
Page V11-T4-35
Product Description
This line of switches employs a quickmake/quick-break contact mechanism.
These switches are especially suited for
use in small motor applications.
Eaton’s new, competitively priced, AC
rated X Series toggles offer a standard
high rating for both single- and two-pole
applications.
The most common application
for this switch is to help prevent
motor damage resulting from
the high current generation by
counter EMF of the armature at the
time of reversing.
4
4
V11-T4-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-3
V11-T4-9
V11-T4-11
V11-T4-20
V11-T4-24
V11-T4-27
V11-T4-31
V11-T4-35
Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles
4.2
Contents
Military Purpose Toggles
Page
4
V11-T4-6
V11-T4-7
4
Description
Military Purpose Toggles
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Description
Eaton’s military purpose
switches are designed to
meet the requirements of
MIL-S-83731. Sealed
Switches have a silicone
rubber lever seal assembled
between the lever and the
bushing to resist the entrance
of contaminants such as
dust, sand or water into the
contact structure.
The switch mechanisms are
completely enclosed to resist
the entrance of contaminants
into the switch. All metal
parts are plated to resist
corrosion. The heavy duty
switches are offered in both
standard toggle lever and
lever lock versions. Circuit
designations are stamped on
the side of each switch.
4
Standards and
Certifications
●
4
MIL-S-83731
4
4
4
4
4
Product Selection
4
AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-S-83731
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
Current
Ratings
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
4
Military
Solder Lug Terminals
Base
Circuit
See
Page V11-T4-35
Dimension
“A”
Inches (mm)
Dimension
“B”
Inches (mm)
MIL-S-83731
with Sealed
Lever
Catalog
Number
Single-Pole
See A
below
1PST
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON
A
—
0.906 (23.01)
MS25098-22
MS25098-29
MS25098-30
8261K22
8261K29
8261K30
See A
below
1PDT
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
B
0.937 (23.80)
—
MS25098-23
MS25098-26
8261K23
8261K26
Two-Pole
See B
below
2PST
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON
C
—
0.906 (23.01)
MS25100-22
MS25100-29
MS25100-30
8262K22
8262K29
8262K30
See C
below
2PDT
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
D
0.937 (23.80)
—
MS25100-23
MS25100-26
8262K23
8262K26
Current Ratings
Current Capacity in Amperes
per Pole = 125 Vac, 60 Hz
Part Number
A AII MS25098
B MS25100-22, 29, 30
C MS25100-23, 26
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
3.0
3.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.0
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-3
4.2
Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 with Lever Seal
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
4
Poles
and
Throw
4
Current
Ratings
4
Single-Pole
4
4
4
4
4
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length
“A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length
“B”
Inches (mm)
Screw Terminals
with Sealed Lever
MS Part
Number
Catalog
Number
See A
below
See B
below
1PST
ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
A
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
MS35058-22
MS35058-24
MS35058-29
MS35058-25
MS35058-28
MS35058-30
8801K22
8801K23
8813K17
8813K18
8811K18
8811K17
See A
below
See B
below
1PDT
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
MS35058-21
MS35058-23
MS35058-26
MS35058-27
MS35058-31
8800K16
8810K15
8804K13
8812K14
8809K16
See C
below
See D
below
2PST
ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
C
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
MS35059-22
MS35059-24
MS35059-29
MS35059-25
MS35059-28
MS35059-30
8822K20
8822K21
8828K13
8828K12
8826K14
8826K15
See C
below
See D
below
2PDT
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
D
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
MS35059-21
MS35059-23
MS35059-26
MS35059-27
MS35059-31
8820K16
8824K14
8830K13
8834K5
8832K6
See E
below
1P3T
in a
2P base
ON 1
ON 1
MOM. ON 1
ON 1
ON 1
MOM. ON 1
ON 2
ON 2
ON 2
ON 3
ON 3
ON 3
ON 4
MOM. ON 4
MOM. ON 4
ON 4
MOM. ON 4
MOM. ON 4
See
Page V11-T4-35
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
MS25201-4
MS25201-5
MS25201-6
MS25201-7
MS25201-8
MS25201-9
8860K4
8860K5
8860K6
8860K7 5
8860K8 5
8860K9 5
See F
below
See G
below
4PST
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
E
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
—
MS25068-24
MS25068-25
MS25068-28
—
7660K12
7660K13
7668K7
7666K9
7666K6
See F
below
See G
below
4PDT
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
F
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
MS25068-21
MS25068-23
MS25068-26
MS25068-27
MS25068-31
7662K7
7664K5
7674K5
7672K5
7670K6
Two-Pole
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Four-Pole
4
4
4
4
4
Current Ratings
Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
28 Vdc
115 Vac, 60 Hz
Switch
Type of
Operation
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
MS35058
MS35058
MS35059
MS35059
MS25201
MS25068
MS25068
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
ON-ON-ON
Maintained
Momentary
7
5
7
5
5
5
4
25
20
20
18
18
20
18
15
10
15
10
10
12
10
—
—
—
—
2
—
—
10
10
20
11
11
—
—
10
7
—
—
8
—
—
3
—
4
—
2
4
2
10
—
20
—
11
20
11
10
—
15
—
8
15
5
4
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
4
4
4
115 Vac, 400 Hz
Notes
1
Across terminals 2-3 and 5-6.
2
Across terminals 1-2 and 5-6.
3
Across terminals 2-3 and 4-5.
4
Across terminals 1-2 and 4-5.
5
For “INDEPENDENT ON-ON-ON” circuit arrangement, see Page V11-T4-35.
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4.2
Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 Lever Lock with Lever Seal
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
Current
Ratings
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Poles
and
Throw
Base
Circuit
See
(Keyway) Page V11-T4-35
Lever
Lock
Bushing
Style 1
4
Screw Terminals
with Sealed Lever
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever Lock
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
4
MS Part
Number
Catalog
Number
Single-Pole
4
4
See A
below
1PST
ON
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
OFF
NONE
A
3
4
5
0.562 (14.27)
1.000 (25.40)
MS25125-C2
MS25125-E2
MS25125-J4
8857K47
8857K48
8857K49
See A
below
1PDT
ON
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
ON
B
2
3
4
0.562 (14.27)
1.000 (25.40)
MS25125-B1
MS25125-C3
MS25125-E3
8857K40
8857K45
8857K44
4
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
C
1
2
4
0.562 (14.27)
1.000 (25.40)
MS25126-A1
MS25126-B1
MS25126-E3
8858K39
8858K40
8858K44
4
ON
NONE
F
4
0.562 (14.27)
1.000 (25.40)
MS25127-E3
8859K44
ON
ON
Two-Pole
See B
below
2PDT
ON
ON
ON
Four-Pole
See C
below
4PDT
ON
Indicates direction against which lever is locked.
Switch
4
4
4
4
Current Ratings
A MS25125
B MS25126
C MS25127
4
Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
28 Vdc
115 Vac, 60 Hz
Type of
Operation
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Maintained
Maintained
Maintained
5
7
5
20
20
20
15
15
15
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3
4
4
10
20
20
10
15
15
115 Vac, 400 Hz
4
4
4
4
Note
1 See illustrations below for lever lock bushing styles.
4
Lever Lock Bushing Styles
Style 1
Style 2
Style 3
Style 4
4
Style 5
4
4
Locked in Three
Positions
Locked in
Center Positions
Locked in
Keyway Side
Locked out of
Center Position
4
Locked in Center
and Side Opposite
Keyway
4
These illustrations are for pictoral representation only—keyway on right-hand side.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-5
4.2
Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) Military with Unsealed Lever
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
CENTER
DOWN
Position
Position
Position
4
4
Current
Ratings
4
Single-Pole
4
4
Poles
and
Throw
4
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON
A
0.468 (11.89)
0.688 (17.45)
7300K38
7304K38
7303K38
7300K36
7304K36
7303K36
See A below
1PDT
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B
0.468 (11.89)
0.688 (17.45)
7301K38
7302K38
7307K38
7306K38
7305K38
7301K36
7302K36
7307K36
7306K36
7305K36
See C below
See D below
2PST
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON
C
0.468 (11.89)
0.688 (17.45)
7310K38
7314K38
7313K38
7310K36
7314K36
7313K36
See C below
2PDT
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
D
0.468 (11.89)
0.688 (17.45)
7311K38
7312K38
7317K38
7316K38
7315K38
7311K36
7312K36
7317K36
7316K36
7315K36
See D below
Current Ratings
4
4
Type of
Operation
4
Single-Pole
A Maintained
B Momentary
Two-Pole
C Maintained
D Momentary
4
4
4
5
4
20
15
15
10
15
15
7
5
30
20
15
10
25
15
Horsepower
250 Vac, 60 Hz
Resistive
Inductive
Load
Load
Horsepower
—
—
—
—
6
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
9
6
—
—
—
—
Description
Specification
Ratings
See Product Selection tables
Circuits
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, 1P3T (ON-ON-ON), 4PST and 4PDT; maintained and momentary action
Contact action
Heavy duty—Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
Medium duty—Quick-make/quick-break, wiping action
Contact material
Heavy duty:
Movable—silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Medium duty:
Movable—copper silver-plated
Stationary—bronze silver-plated
Terminal types
Heavy duty MIL-S-83731 types:
Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32 x 6.35 mm (0.250 in) pan head (Catalog Number 11-1893) screws and Si bronze #6 helical lockwasher (Catalog Number
16-1096). Furnished unassembled. Terminal screws are tin dipped to facilitate soldering if required
Heavy duty JAN-S-23 types:
Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32 x 4.78 mm (0.188 in) binding head (Catalog Number 811-2) screws. Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—tintillate plated brass
Medium duty MIL-S-83731 types:
Solder lugs—brass silver-plated furnished with 0.094 in (2.39 mm) dia. hole
Base material
Thermoset molding material
Mounting means
Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep; provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied:
MIL-S-83731 types— 2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6), 1 locking ring (Catalog Number 29-761) and 1 internal tooth lockwasher (Catalog Number 16-886).
Furnished unassembled
JAN-S-23 types—2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6). Furnished unassembled
4
4
125 Vac, 60 Hz
Resistive
Inductive
Load
Load
Military Purpose Switches
4
4
Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
30 Vdc
Lamp
Resistive
Inductive
Load
Load
Load
Technical Data and Specifications
4
4
Screw
Terminals
Catalog
Number
ON
ON
OFF
4
4
Solder Lug
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Two-Pole
4
4
Lever
Length
“B”
Inches (mm)
1PST
See B below
4
4
Bushing
Length
“A”
Inches (mm)
See A below
See B below
4
4
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See
Page V11-T4-35
4
4
Dielectric
1000V minimum
4
Operating temperature
range
0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
V11-T4-6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4.2
Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-83731 Switches
4
1PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug)
0.070
(1.78)
14˚
0.687
(17.45)
0.680
(17.27)
14˚
0.687
(17.45)
0.041
(1.01)
15/32−32NS−2A
0.468
(11.89)
Dim. A
0.937
(23.80)
0.070
(1.78)
14˚
0.680
(17.27)
14˚
1
1.250
(31.75)
2
3 (Ref.)
Dim. A
0.937
(23.80)
4
5
6 (Ref.)
1
2
3 (Ref.)
0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal
0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal
0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal
1.250
(31.75)
B
15/32-32 Thds.
0.620
(15.75)
4
A
1.310
(33.27)
#6−32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Pan Head Screws
4
1.060
(26.92)
1.040
(26.42)
0.750
(19.05)
4
1.310
(33.27)
1.120
(28.45)
15/32−32 Thds.
4
4
#6-32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Long Pan Head Screws
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide B
4
4
Four-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action
15/32−32 Thds.
1.430
(36.32)
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
4
4
B
4
A
A
1.200
(30.48)
4
4
B
A
Two-Pole Momentary Action and 3 ON Circuits
4
4
0.750
(19.05)
#6-32 x 0.180 (4.57)
Long Pan Head Screws
4
4
Two-Pole Maintained Action
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
15/32-32 Thds.
4
4
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Switches with Lever Seal
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
4
4
Dim. B
0.906
(23.01)
0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal
Single-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action
4
4
0.041
(1.01)
15/32−32NS−2A
0.468
(11.89)
Dim. B
0.906
(23.01)
4
2PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug)
4
1.320
(33.53)
4
1.250
(31.75)
4
4
#6−32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Long Pan Head Screws
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
V11-T4-7
4.2
4
4
4
4
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Lever Lock Switches
with Lever Seal
AC Rated (Heavy Duty)
Single-Pole
1PDT Maintained Action
4
28˚
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
14˚
15/32-32 Thds.
1.120
(28.45)
B
0.620
(15.75)
0.620
(15.75)
1.140
(28.96)
1.120
(28.45)
Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)
60˚
#6-32 x 0.180 (4.57)
Long Binding Head Screw
Two-Pole
4
2PDT Maintained Action
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
4
28˚
14˚
0.750
(19.05)
4
B
15/32-32 Thds.
B
4
0.900
(22.86)
Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
A
A
4
4
1.040
(26.42)
#6-32 Screws
4
4
15/32-32 Thds.
A
A
4
4
B
15/32
Dia.
4
4
Military Purpose Toggles
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
4
Toggle Switches
1.250
(31.75)
1.310
(33.27)
0.760
(19.30)
0.030
(0.76)
Ref.
0.270 (6.86)
0.040
(1.02)
#6-32 Screws
0.180 (4.57)
Four-Pole
2PDT Momentary Action
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
36˚
18˚
0.750
(19.05)
0.800
(20.32)
B
15/32-32 Thds.
B
Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)
A
A
1.310
(33.27)
1.310
(33.27)
4
4
1.590
(40.39)
0.910
(23.11)
#6-32 Screws
0.300
(7.62)
4
V11-T4-8
0.030
(0.76)
Ref.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4.3
Toggle Switches
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Contents
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Page
4
V11-T4-10
V11-T4-10
4
Description
Illuminated AC Rated Switches
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Description
These illuminated toggles
are available only in singlepole circuitry. A two-pole
base is utilized with singlepole housing the lamp. On
single-throw circuits, the
lamp is wired to operate in
conjunction with the switch.
4
On double-throw circuits, the
lamp is independent of the
switch. On the sealed
versions, a silicone rubber
seal is fitted to the paddle
lever to provide a moistureand dust-resistant seal
between the lever and
bushing.
4
4
4
4
4
Catalog Number Selection
4
How To Order—Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Example:
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Standard
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PST
Sealed
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PST
1PDT
ON
NONE
7071K21
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Base
Catalog
Number
Circuit
Number
See
Page
V11-T4-35
OFF
7071K21
G
G
1
52
4
4
Code letters and/or numbers—
add to base circuit number.
Lever Color
G = Green
T = Red
A = Amber
Bulb Voltage
4
1 = 14V
4
Terminal Type
ON
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
MOM. ON
7073K21
7073K20
7073K25
G
4
52 = 0.250 in spade
4
4
H
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-9
4.3
4
4
Toggle Switches
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Technical Data and Specifications
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Description
Specification
4
Ratings
See Catalog Number Selection
Circuits
1PST and 1PDT; maintained and momentary action
4
Contact material
Movable—silver-plated copper
Stationary—silver-plated copper
4
Terminal types
Spade—brass
Base material
Colored thermoplastic paddle lever
4
4
4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Illuminated
0.210 (5.33) Dia.
4
4
0.070 (1.78)
1.310
(33.27)
28˚
14˚
0.270
(6.86)
0.750
(19.05)
0.650
(16.51)
4
0.470
(11.94)
4
4
0.910
(23.11)
1.430
(36.32)
4
A
4
0.250 (6.35)
Keyway
0.030 (0.76)
0.070 (1.78)
Wide
Deep x
0.040 (1.02)
0.080 (2.03)
Quick Connect 0.440 (11.18)
Type
“A” Dim.
0.030 (0.76) Ref.
0.030 (0.76)
1.310 (33.27)
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-10
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
4.4
Contents
General Purpose Toggles
Description
Page
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T4-12
V11-T4-16
V11-T4-16
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Description
Features
These AC rated toggle
switches offer the widest
selection of features and the
design flexibility to meet a
variety of applications.
The optional features shown
below may not be available
on all toggle models. Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900
Series
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
3-independent ON Circuit
(2PDT or 4PDT only, see
Page V11-T4-14)
Short (11/32 in) bushing
Tall (15/32 in) bushing
White nylon designer
lever, see Dimensions
on Page V11-T4-16
Black nylon designer
lever, see Dimensions
on Page V11-T4-16
Hardware—
furnished assembled
Reversing jumpers (not for
use with 3-independent
ON circuit)
Short (15/32 in) bat lever
Tall (11/16 in) bat lever
(not available with short
bushing)
Rotate keyway 180°
Lever seal
Omit one pole (2P, 3P,
4P only. Not for use
with 3-independent
ON circuit)
4
Options
7800 Series Only
●
●
●
●
●
●
3-independent ON circuit
(2PDT or 4PDT only, see
Page V11-T4-14)
Hardware—
furnished assembled
Reversing jumpers (Not for
use with 3-independent
ON circuit)
Rotate keyway 180°
Silicone lever seal
(1P and 2P only)
Omit one pole (2P, 3P,
4P only. Not for use
with 3-independent
ON circuit)
Combi-Term Option
This is an extension of our AC
rated general purpose toggle
switch. The “Combi-Term”
design allows the user the
option of screw terminals,
0.25 in quick connects or
solder termination all on the
same switch. The special
clips and screws are provided
in a poly bag with the switch.
Circuits
●
●
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT,
3PST, 3PDT, 4PST and
4PDT
Maintained and
momentary
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
UL®
Recognized
CSA® Certified
(except as noted)
RoHS Compliant 1
4
4
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-11
4.4
4
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Product Selection
4
AC Rated Toggle Switches—Single-Pole
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
4
4
Rating
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw
DOWN
Position
Catalog Number
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
OFF
A
ON
NONE
1PDT
ON
OFF
ON
B
1PDT
ON
NONE
ON
B
1PDT
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
OFF
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B
1PST
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
1PST
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
1PDT
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
1PDT
ON
MOM. ON
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125V Vac
1PST
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)
7580K7
7580K6
7580K5
7580K4
7580K9
7580K8
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7581K6
7581K4
7581K8
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7582K6
7582K4
7582K8
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7585K6
7587K6
7585K4
7587K4
7585K8
7587K8
A
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7506K3
7506K4
7506K6
A
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7506K38
7506K36
7506K40
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7509K4
7510K6
7509K5
7510K7
7509K7
7510K9
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7508K38
7509K38
7508K36
7509K36
7508K40
7509K40
ON
NONE
OFF
A
0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)
7501K12
7501K13
7500K13 1
7500K14 1
7501K14
7501K15
1PDT
ON
OFF
ON
B
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7503K13 1
7502K13
7503K15
1PDT
ON
NONE
ON
B
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7505K4
7504K4 1
7505K6
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PST
ON
NONE
OFF
A
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7546K38
7546K36
7546K40
4
30A, 125 Vac
25A, 250 Vac 2
1PST
ON
NONE
OFF
A
0.344 (8.74)
0.563 (14.30)
—
7576K2
—
4
Notes
1 Also 4.2A L at 125 Vac rating.
2 Single-pole switch in two-pole base.
4
1PST
Bushing
Lever
Length “A”
Length “B” Solder
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs
4
4
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-12
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4.4
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
AC Rated Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
Rating
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw
DOWN
Position
4
Catalog Number
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Lever
Length “A” Length “B” Solder
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs
0.250 in
Screw
CombiSpade
Terminals Terminals Term
4
4
4
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2A, 277 Vac
2.5A, L at 125 Vac
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
C
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7590K6
7590K4
7590K8
—
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2.5A, L at 125 Vac
2PDT
ON
OFF
ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7591K6
7591K4
7591K8
—
2PDT
ON
NONE
ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7592K6
7592K4
7592K8
—
4
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2PDT
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7597K6
7597K4
7597K8
—
2PDT
ON
ON
OFF
7530
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7530K1
7530K3
7530K2
—
4
10A 250 Vac,
15A 125 Vac, 1/4 hp
125–250 Vac
2PDT
ON
ON
ON
7555
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7555K12
7555K11
7555K13
—
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
C
0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)
7561K5
7561K4
7560K6
7560K5
7561K7
7561K6
—
4
4
4
4
4
15A, 125 Vac
2PDT
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac
ON
OFF
ON
D
0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)
7563K5
7563K4
7562K5
7562K4
7563K7
7563K6
—
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT
ON
NONE
ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7565K5
7564K6
7565K7
—
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
2PST
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
C
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7566K4
7566K5
7566K7
—
2PDT
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7568K3 1
7569K1
7570K4
7568K2 1
7569K2
7570K5
7568K4 1
7569K3
7570K7
—
—
—
2PDT
MOM. ON
OFF
MOM. ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7569K38
7569K36
7569K40
—
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
C
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7630K38
7630K36
7630K40
—
2PDT
ON
NONE
ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7632K38
7632K36
7632K40
—
4
Section A
10A 250 Vac;
15A 125 Vac,
3/4 hp 250 Vac,
4.2A L 125 Vac;
Section B
10A 250 Vac,
15A 125 Vac,
1/4 hp 250 Vac
2PDT
OFF
1 ON
2 ON
7571
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7571K2
7571K4
7571K6
—
4
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 120–240 Vac
2PST
ON
NONE
OFF
C
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7803K11
2PDT
ON
ON
MOM. ON
OFF
NONE
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7803K12
7803K32
7803K22 3 7803K42
7803K13
7803K33
7803K23 3 7803K43
7803K17 2 7803K37 2 7803K27 2 7803K47
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
7803K31
7803K21 2 7803K41
2
Notes
1 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.
2 Not CSA Certified.
3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120–240–277 Vac.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-13
4.4
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
AC Rated Toggle Switches—Three-Pole
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
4
UP
Position
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
DOWN
Position
Catalog Number
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1 hp, 3 Ph
125–600 Vac
1 hp, 1 and 2 Ph
125–480 Vac
3PST
ON
NONE
OFF
E
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7700K1
7700K2
7700K3
—
3PDT
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
F
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7701K1
7702K1
7701K2
7702K2
7701K3
7702K3
—
—
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
3PDT
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
F
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7704K1
7705K1
7704K2
7705K2
7704K3
7705K3
—
—
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 120 Vac
1, 2 and 3 Ph
3PDT
ON
OFF
ON
F
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7804K12
7804K32 2 7804K22 2 7804K42 2
Rating
4
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw
Bushing
Lever
Length “A” Length “B” Solder
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs
0.250 in
Screw
Spade
CombiTerminals Terminals Term
24
AC Rated Toggle Switches—Four-Pole
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
4
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Catalog Number
4
Rating
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
4
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
4PST
ON
NONE
OFF
E
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7691K14
7690K8
—
—
4PDT
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
F
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7693K2
7695K5
7692K13
7694K4
—
—
—
—
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
4PST
ON
NONE
OFF
E
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7933K38
7933K36
7933K40
—
4PDT
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
F
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7934K38
7935K38
7934K36
7935K36
7934K40
7935K40
—
—
20A, 125 Vac
4PDT
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125–240 Vac
2 and 3 Ph
ON
OFF
ON
F
0.469 (11.91)
0.688 (17.48)
7805K12 2 7805K32 2 7805K22 2 7805K42 2
4
4
4
4
Poles
and
Throw
Bushing
Lever
Length “A” Length “B” Solder
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs
0.250 in
Screw
Spade
CombiTerminals Terminals Term
Notes
1 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.
2 Not CSA Certified.
3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120–240–277 Vac.
4
1 hp at 240–480 Vac single- or two-phase and 240–600 Vac three-phase.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-14
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
4.4
AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches—Single-Pole
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
Rating
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw
4
Catalog Number
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1PST
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
A
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
7506K20
7506K21
1PDT
MOM. ON
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
OFF
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
—
—
7509K20
7510K20
7508K20
7509K21
7510K21
7508K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125V–250 Vac
1PST
ON
NONE
OFF
A
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7501K22
7500K20 2
7501K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PDT
ON
OFF
ON
B
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
7502K20
7503K21
1PDT
ON
NONE
ON
B
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
7504K20 2
7505K21
4
4
4
4
4
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw
ON
NONE
Catalog Number
DOWN
Position
4
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
OFF
C
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
7560K20
7561K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
2PST
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac
2PDT
ON
OFF
ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
7562K20
7563K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT
ON
NONE
ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
7564K20
7565K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
2PST
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
C
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
7566K20
7566K21
2PDT
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
—
—
—
7568K20 2
7569K20
7570K20
7568K21 2
7569K21
7570K21
4
4
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw
4
4
4
4
4
Catalog Number
DOWN
Position
4
4
AC Rated Special Circuit Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
Rating
4
4
AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
Rating
4
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac
2PDT
2-3, 5-6
OFF
2-6, 5-3
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7563K24
7562K23
7563K25
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT
2-3, 5-6
NONE
2-6, 5-3
D
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
7565K24
7564K23
7565K25
4
4
4
4
4
Notes
1 Seal is lever seal only and is dust and splash resistant. Panel seal is available, Part Number 32-341.
2 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-15
4.4
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
4
Technical Data and Specifications
4
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Description
Specification
4
Ratings
See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
4
Contact mechanism
Slow-make/slow-brake butt contact
Terminal types
Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32x 3/16 binding head (Cat. No. 811-2) screws
Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—tintillate-plated brass
Spade terminals—combi-term—brass
Base material
Thermoset molding material
Mounting means
Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled facenut
(Cat. No. 15-124F1), except 7700–7705, which have bright nickel hexagon facenut (Cat. No. 15-966-2)
Furnished unassembled
Finish
Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing
4
4
4
4
4
4
Dielectric withstand
1000V rms minimum
Operating temperature
range
0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
4
Contact Material
4
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series Switches
3 to 6
Silver-plated copper
Silver-plated copper
4
10 to 20
Silver-plated copper with silver buttons
Silver-plated copper with silver buttons
4
20 to 30
Silver-plated copper with cad oxide buttons
Copper with cad oxide buttons
7800 Series Switches
3 to 6
Silver-plated copper
Silver-plated copper
10 to 20
Copper with silver buttons
Copper with silver buttons
4
Ampere
Movable
Stationary
4
4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series
4
1PST Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)
4
4
B
4
A
0.625
(15.87)
0.300
(7.62)
4
4
1.125
(28.57)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
0.469
(11.91)
4
1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
0.469
(11.91)
B
0.625
(15.87)
1.047
(26.59)
1.218
(30.93)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-16
A
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
1.100
(27.95)
0.440
(11.17)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
4.4
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued
2PDT Maintained (Solder Lugs)
4
2PDT Maintained (Spade Terminals)
4
28°
28°
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
14°
14°
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
B
1.312
(33.32)
A
4
B
1.312
(33.32)
0.469
(11.91)
A
0.750 (19.05)
0.740 (18.79)
0.750
(19.05)
1.031
(26.18)
0.469
(11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
0.270
(6.85)
0.440
(11.17)
36°
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
B
0.270
(6.86)
1.047
(26.59)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
0.562
(14.27)
1.312
(33.32)
0.469
(11.91)
0.750 0.797
(19.05) (20.24)
1.125
(28.57)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
0.910
(23.11)
0.300
(7.62)
2PDT Momentary (Spade Terminals)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
B
A
1.062
(26.97)
0.300
(7.62)
4
0.910
(23.11)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
0.440
(11.18)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
0.469
(11.91)
0.750
(19.05)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
4
4
0.562
(14.27)
1.312
(33.32)
0.469
(11.91)
4
4
18°
14°
0.797
(20.24)
4
4
36°
1.312
(33.32)
4
4
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
28°
0.750 (19.05)
0.740 (18.79)
4
4
A
0.625
(15.87)
4
4
18°
0.469
(11.91)
4
4
2PDT Momentary (Screw Terminals)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
4
4
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
1.200
(30.48)
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-17
4.4
4
4
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued
3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)
31°
15.5°
4
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
1.312
(33.32)
0.562
(14.27)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
0.688
(17.47)
0.469 (11.91)
1.265
(32.13)
1.437 1.546
(36.49) (39.26)
0.469
(11.91)
0.750
(19.05)
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
0.300
(7.62)
0.910
(23.11)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
0.270
(6.85)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
0.688
(17.47)
0.469
(11.91)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)
4
15.5°
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
4
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
0.688 0.469
(17.47) (11.91)
0.965
(24.51)
4
0.300 (7.62)
4
1.225
(31.11)
1.437 1.546
(36.49) (39.26)
31°
4
4
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
4
4
1.437
(36.49)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
18°
4
4
0.469
(11.91)
4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)
36°
4
4
0.440
(11.17)
2PDT Momentary (Solder Lugs)
4
0.688
(17.47)
0.965
(24.51)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
0.270
(6.85)
4
4
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
4
4
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
1.437
(36.49)
0.965
(24.51)
4
15.5°
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
0.688 0.469
(17.47) (11.91)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
4
4
3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)
31°
4
4
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
4
Toggle Switches
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
1.437
(36.49)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
0.688
(17.47)
0.469 (11.91)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
1.437 1.546
(36.49) (39.26)
4
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
1.405
(35.68)
0.440 (11.17)
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
4
4
V11-T4-18
0.270
(6.85)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
4.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
7800 Series
2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.671
(17.04)
4
4PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
4
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
4
0.687
(17.45)
15/32-32
(11.91 TPI)
4
0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)
0.469
(11.91)
0.469
(11.91)
0.812
(20.62)
4
4
0.812
(20.62)
1.312
0.234 (33.32)
(5.94)
0.750
(19.05)
4
0.234
(5.54)
4
1.437 (36.50)
1.296 (32.92)
4
2PDT Maintained (Combi-Terminals)
4
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.671
(17.04)
4
3PDT Maintained (0.25 in Spade Terminals)
4
0.687
(17.45)
15/32-32
(11.91 TPI)
4
0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)
0.469
(11.91)
0.469
(11.91)
0.812
(20.62)
4
4
0.812
(20.62)
4
0.440
(11.17)
0.375
(9.53)
1.312
(33.32)
0.750
(19.05)
1.296 (32.92)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
4
1.437 (36.50)
4
3PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
4
Combi-Term Termination Options
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.687
(17.45)
4
4
0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)
0.469
(11.91)
4
4
0.812
(20.62)
0.218
(5.54)
Solder
1.296 (32.92)
Quick Connect
4
Screw
4
1.437 (36.50)
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-19
4.5
4
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Contents
General Purpose Toggles
Description
4
Page
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
V11-T4-21
V11-T4-21
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Description
This line of switches employs
a quick-make/quick-break
contact mechanism. The
resultant high-speed
movement eliminates the
“teasing” of the switch and
reduces the pitting of the
Options
contact surfaces due to
arcing. Self-cleaning and
wiping contact action assures
positive contact on switch
operation. These switches
are especially suited for use
in small motor applications.
●
●
●
●
Standards and
Certifications
Lever—11/16 in
Lever seal
Mounting hardware;
furnished assembled
Other lead lengths
●
●
●
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
4
4
UL Recognized
CSA Certified
RoHS Compliant 1
Product Selection
4
AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches—Single-Pole
4
4
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
3A, 250 Vdc
1PST
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST
3A, 250 Vdc
4
4
1PDT
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Base Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
Wire
Leads
ON
NONE
OFF
A
0.344 (8.74)
0.500 (12.70)
8280K115
8295K107
8290K115
ON
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
OFF
A
0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.469 (11.91)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
8381K107
8381K108
8928K478
8396K107
8396K108
—
8391K107
8391K108
—
ON
NONE
ON
B
0.469 (11.91)
0.500 (12.70)
8928K479
—
—
Base Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
Wire
Leads
4
4
AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
4
Rating
4
7A, 125V
3A, 250 Vdc
4
4
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
2PST
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
C
0.469 (11.91)
0.469 (11.91)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
8370K107
8928K481 1
8372K107
8928K482 1
8371K107
—
2PDT
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
ON
D
0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
8373K108
8373K107
8375K108
8375K107
8374K108
8374K107
Note
1 Rating: 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc and 3A, 250 Vdc.
4
4
V11-T4-20
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4.5
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications
4
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
4
Description
Specification
Ratings
See Product Selection table; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
Circuits
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT
Maintained and momentary toggle action
Contact mechanism
Quick-make/quick-break wiping action
Contact material
Bronze silver-plated
Terminal types
Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #5-40 x 5/32 in (Cat. No. 11-26) screws
Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—brass silver-plated with 0.085–0.090 in (2.16–2.29 mm) dia. hole
Integrated wire leads—18 gauge, 6 in long and skinned 3/4 in
Special wire leads lengths beyond 6 in are available at additional charge
4
4
4
4
4
Base material
Thermoset molding material
Mounting means
Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled
facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1)
Furnished unassembled
Finish
Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing
Operating temperature range
0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
4
4
4
4
Dimensions
4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8280K115
1PST Maintained
(Solder Lug)
8290K115
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.500
(12.70)
8295K107
1PST Maintained
(Screw Terminals)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.500
(12.70)
0.532
(13.51)
0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
1.093
(27.78)
0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
D
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
BC
A
B
B C
C
0.200
(5.08)
0.562
(14.28)
0.046
(1.19)
0.562
(14.28)
0.968
(24.60)
1.250
(31.75)
#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw
Standard 6.000 (152.40)
Long Wire Leads
4
A
4
B
0.046
(1.19)
0.562
(14.28)
0.968
(24.60)
0.968
(24.60)
0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
A
A
4
4
D
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
4
4
0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
D
D
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
4
0.671
(17.06)
1.000
(25.40)
0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
4
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.500
(12.70)
1.000
(25.40)
1.000
(25.40)
4
8381K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Solder Lug)
C
0.687
(17.46)
4
4
0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole
0.203
(5.15)
4
4
4
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.411
(35.84)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.406
(35.71)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.406
(35.71)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.531
(38.89)
29-1/2°
4
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.656
(42.06)
25-1/2°
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-21
4.5
4
4
8391K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)
C
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
A
0.685
(17.39)
B
A
B
C
C
0.687
(17.46)
1.093
(27.78)
0.950
(24.13)
Standard
6.000 (152.40)
Long Wire Leads
4
4
D
A
B
4
4
0.242 (6.14) Dia.
D
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
4
1.156
(29.36)
0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
4
4
0.690
(17.52)
1.390
(35.32)
D
4
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.671
(17.06)
0.240 (6.09)
4
8928K478
1PST Momentary
(Solder Lug)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.664
(16.86)
4
4
8396K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Screw Terminals)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
4
4
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
4
Toggle Switches
1.093
(27.78)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole
#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.531
(38.89)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.531
(38.89)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.980
(50.29)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.656
(42.06)
25-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.656
(42.06)
25-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.656
(42.06)
25-1/2°
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-22
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
8370 and 8373K107 and
K108
2PST/2PDT Maintained
(Solder Lug)
8371 and 8374K107 and
K108
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)
8373 and 8375K107 and
K108
2PST/2PDT Maintained
(Screw Terminals)
4
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
4
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.687
(17.46)
0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
4
4
1.156
(29.37)
1.656 (42.07)
1.156
(29.36)
0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
4
0.687
(17.46)
0.687
(17.46)
1.156
(29.36)
4.5
4
4
These Terminals Omitted on
Single-Throw Switches
D
D
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
15/32 Dia.32 Thds.
D
A
B
B
C
0.640
(16.27)
4
0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
A
4
C
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
1.080 (27.43)
B C
0.873 (22.17)
0.830 (21.08)
1.000 (25.40)
0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole
0.281
Double-Throw (7.14)
Two Solder Lugs
Omitted for
Single-Throw
4
A
4
0.640
(16.27)
4
1.093
(27.78)
#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw
4
0.343
(8.73)
4
Single-Throw
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.694
(43.03)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.484
(37.69)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.484
(37.69)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.820
(46.23)
25-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.515
(38.48)
25-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.609
(40.87)
25-1/2°
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-23
4.6
4
Toggle Switches
X Series Toggles
Contents
X Series Toggles
Description
4
Page
X Series Toggles
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
V11-T4-25
V11-T4-25
V11-T4-25
V11-T4-26
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Description
Eaton’s new, competitively
priced, AC rated X Series
toggles offer a standard high
rating for both single- and
two-pole applications. The
new X Series toggle line
offers a wide range of
switching circuits, functions
and accessories. Ratings for
single- and two-pole include
20A at 125 Vac and 10A at
277 Vac to handle more
severe inductive, motor and
lamp loads.
In addition, X Series toggles
have a high standard horsepower rating of 1-1/2 hp,
125–250 Vac for two-pole
applications.
Application Description
The easy-to-install toggles
also have an industrystandard 0.48 in diameter
mounting hole. For added
convenience and delivery
support, select industrystandard switch circuit part
numbers are available from
stock. With so many
features, X Series toggles
can be used in a variety of
applications.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Commercial and industrial
equipment
Household appliances
Industrial machinery and
automation
Medical equipment
Military communications
and surveillance
Rail systems
Signaling and
communications
Test and lab equipment
Telecommunications, cable
and broadcasting
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-24
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
UL Recognized component
for Canada File E2702
RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
4.6
Toggle Switches
X Series Toggles
Product Selection
4
Single-Pole 1
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
Poles and
Throw
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position 2
Terminal Type—Catalog Number
0.250 in Spade
Screw
Solder Lugs
1PST
ON
NONE
OFF
XTD1A1A2
XTD1A2A2
XTD1A3A2
1PST
ON 3
NONE
OFF
XTD1F1A2
XTD1F2A2
XTD1F3A2
1PDT
ON
OFF
ON
XTD2B1A
XTD2B2A
XTD2B3A
1PDT
ON
NONE
ON
XTD2C1A
XTD2C2A
XTD2C3A
1PDT
ON
NONE
ON 3
XTD2D1A
XTD2D2A
XTD2D3A
OFF
ON
3
XTD2E1A
XTD2E2A
XTD2E3A
OFF
ON 3
XTD2G1A
XTD2G2A
XTD2G3A
1PDT
ON
1PDT
ON
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
Two-Pole 4
Circuit with Toggle in …
4
DOWN
Position 2
Terminal Type—Catalog Number
0.250 in Spade
Screw
Solder Lugs
NONE
OFF
XTD3A1A2
XTD3A2A2
XTD3A3A2
NONE
OFF
XTD3F1A2
XTD3F2A2
XTD3F3A2
ON
OFF
ON
XTD4B1A
XTD4B2A
XTD4B3A
2PDT
ON
NONE
ON
XTD4C1A
XTD4C2A
XTD4C3A
2PDT
ON
NONE
ON 3
XTD4D1A
XTD4D2A
XTD4D3A
2PDT
ON 3
OFF
ON 3
XTD4E1A
XTD4E2A
XTD4E3A
2PDT
ON
OFF
ON 3
XTD4G1A
XTD4G2A
XTD4G3A
Poles and
Throw
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
2PST
ON
2PST
ON 3
2PDT
4
4
4
4
4
Notes
1 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc.
2 Keyway position.
3 Indicates momentary position.
4 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 1-1/2 hp, 125–250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc.
4
4
Accessories
4
See Accessories on Page V11-T4-31.
4
Technical Data and Specifications
4
X Series Toggles
Description
Specification
Single-pole rating
20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 3/4 hp 125–250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc
Two-pole rating
20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 1-1/2 hp 125–250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc
Available circuits
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT
Terminal types
Brass screw, brass solder lugs, brass nickel-plated 0.250 in spade
Hardware included
Zinc nickel-plated knurl nut, zinc nickel-plated hex nut
Mounting means
Threaded bushing 12.0 +0.1, –0 mm; 16.5 +1, –1 mm
Keyway
1.8 mm located in DOWN position
Base material
Thermoset molding material
Finish
Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing
Contact mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
Contact resistance
50 ohm maximum
Dielectric strength
AC 1500V, 1 minute
Operating temperature
32° to 149°F (0° to 65°C)
Insulation resistance
DC 500V 100M ohm minute
Seal level rating
IP40
Packaging
Sealed in polybag labeled with part number
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-25
4.6
4
4
Toggle Switches
X Series Toggles
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
4
Keyway
4
0.629 ± 0.012
(16.00 ± 0.30)
1.299 ± 0.019
(33.00 ± 0.50)
ø0.236 ± 0.012
(ø6.0 ± 0.30)
4
B
4
C
4
4
4
4
0.063 ± 0.004
(1.60 ± 0.10)
0.433 ± 0.003
(11.00 ± 0.10)
C
D
3
2
1
6
5
4
15/32-32 NS-2A
4
4
ø0.236 ± 0.007
(ø6.00 ± 0.20)
B
D
4
ø0.472 +0.003/–0.000
(ø12.00 +0.10/–0.00)
A
A
4
4
Mounting Hole
0.748 ± 0.019
(19.00 ± 0.50)
1.125 ± 0.012
(28.60 ± 0.30)
4
4
Keyway
A 0.649 ± 0.039
(16.50 ± 1.00)
A 0.649 ± 0.039
(16.50 ± 1.00)
B 0.468 ± 0.012
(11.90 ± 0.30)
B 0.468 ± 0.012
(11.90 ± 0.30)
C 0.677 ± 0.019
(17.20 ± 0.50)
C 0.740 ± 0.019
(18.80 ± 0.50)
D 0.452 ± 0.019
(11.50 ± 0.50)
D 0.452 ± 0.019
(11.50 ± 0.50)
15/32-32 NS-2A
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-26
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Toggle Switches
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
4.7
Contents
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Description
Page
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V11-T4-28
V11-T4-29
V11-T4-29
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Description
One-Hole Panel Mount
These heavy duty toggle
switches are available in
either two- or three-position.
The three-position switches
offer a unique positive center
stop feature, which assures
that the lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the center OFF
position without stopping.
This design feature is a major
factor in their widespread
acceptance for motor
reversing and speed control
applications.
Flush Mount
The most common
application for the switch is to
help prevent motor damage
resulting from the high
current generation by counter
EMF of the armature at the
time of reversing. This type of
device is referred to within
the industry as an antiplugging, hesitation, positive
stop or positive off switch.
Typical applications include
bench tools, coach and truck
(electric lift) and X-ray
equipment.
These three-position
switches also offer the
positive center stop feature
where the lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the center OFF
position without stopping.
The high ratings of this series
allow it to be used with a
broad range of heavy duty
applications. Copper contacts
and brass screw terminals
are standard.
4
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
UL Recognized
(except where noted)
CSA Certified
(where noted)
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-27
4.7
4
Toggle Switches
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Selection
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches—One-Hole Panel Mount
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
4
UP
Position
4
4
4
4
4
DOWN
Position
Catalog Number
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT
ON
OFF
ON
D
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
Bat
7992K11
7992K10
7992K12
15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
3PDT
ON
OFF
ON
F
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
Bat
7991K11
7991K10
7991K12
15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
4PDT
ON
OFF
ON
F
0.468 (11.89)
0.687 (17.45)
Bat
7990K11
7990K10
7990K12
Rating
4
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw 2
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Type
Solder
Screw
Terminals Lugs
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches—Flush Mount
4
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
4
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Lever
Type
Termination
Type
Catalog
Number
NONE
OFF
ON
ON
Square
Square
Screw
Screw
7810K1
7810K2 34
ON
OFF
ON
Square
Screw
7811K5 35
3PDT
ON
OFF
ON
Square
Screw
7812K2
4PDT
ON
OFF
ON
Square
Screw
7813K2
4
Rating
4
20A, 125 Vac/Vdc
10A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2PDT
ON
ON
4
30A, 125 Vac/Vdc
20A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2PDT
4
CENTER
Position
Poles
and
Throw
Notes
1 Listed rating for 125 Vac also applies at 28 Vdc.
2 Supplied in a four-pole base.
3 CSA Certified.
4 Also rated 5A, 600 Vac; 1-1/2 hp, 250 Vdc; 2 hp, 240 Vac.
5 Also rated 2 hp, 250 Vac/Vdc.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-28
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Toggle Switches
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
4.7
Technical Data and Specifications
4
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
4
Description
Specification
Ratings
See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
Circuits
2PDT, 3PDT, 4PDT; maintained action
Contact mechanism
One-hole panel mount
4
4
AC rated devices—slow-make/Slow-break butt contact
AC/DC rated devices—Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts
Flush mount
4
Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts
Contact material
One-hole panel mount
4
AC rated devices:
Movable—silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
AC/DC rated devices:
Movable—copper
Stationary—bronze
Flush mount
Terminal types
Mounting means
One-hole panel mount
Flush mount
4
4
Movable—copper
Stationary—copper
4
Screw terminals—brass
4
AC rated devices:
Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provide anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—
1 hexagon locknut (Catalog Number 15-192) and 1 hex facenut (Catalog Number 15-966-6)
Furnished unassembled
4
4
4
Flush mounting panel tabs
Dielectric withstand
1000V rms minimum
Operating temperature range
0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
4
4
Dimensions
4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
One-Hole Panel Mount
4
7990K10—4PDT
4
32˚
0.430 (10.92)
4
15/32−32 Thds.
0.690
(17.53)
1.450 (36.83)
Max.
1.550 (39.37)
Max.
4
0.470
(11.94)
0.070
(1.78)
1.320
(33.53)
4
0.300
(7.62)
4
0.970
(24.64)
4
4
4
6−32 x 0.188 (4.77)
Binding Head Screw
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-29
4.7
4
4
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush Mount
7810K2—2PDT
4
7811K2—2PDT
3.781 (96.04)
4
4
Toggle Switches
3.781 (96.04)
3.281 (83.34)
3.281 (83.34)
0.968
(24.59)
1.312
(33.34)
4
4
1.593
(40.46)
4
4
3.781
(96.04)
1.859
(47.22)
1.593
(40.46)
4
2.937
(74.60)
4
4
7813K2—4PDT
4
3.781 (96.04)
4
3.281 (83.34)
4
3.281
(83.34)
1.312
(33.34)
4
4
1.890
(48.01)
4
4
4
2.937
(74.60)
0.406
(10.31)
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-30
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
1.812
(46.02)
Toggle Switches
Accessories
4.8
Mounting Hardware
4
Product Description
One-Hole Mounting Switches
All bushing mounted
switches are furnished with
two mounting nuts. One nut
is mounted behind the panel
to prevent the bushing sleeve
from being distorted if the
front panel is overtightened
4
4
Eaton accepts no
responsibility for damage to
switches mounted without
the backup nuts.
4
4
4
4
Product Selection
4
Mounting Hardware for One-Hole Mounting Switches—Mounting Nuts 1
Size
Description
Material
Thickness
Dim. “A” in
Inches (mm)
3/8-27
Hexagon locknut
Nickel-plated brass
0.125 (3.18)
Inside
Diameter
Dim “B” in
Inches (mm)
OD or Dimension
Across Flats
Dim. “C” in
Inches (mm)
Dimension
Across Corners
Dim. “D” in
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
—
0.562 (14.27)
0.625 (15.88)
15-2526-2
3/8-24
Bright nickel-plated brass
11/32-32
Nickel-plated brass
0.063 (1.60)
—
0.473 (12.01)
0.531 (13.49)
15-1525-2
Zinc-chromate treated
0.075 (1.91)
—
0.625 (15.88)
—
15-192
Bright nickel-plated brass
0.078 (1.98)
—
0.546 (13.87)
0.625 (15.88)
15-2525-58
Zinc-chromate treated
0.188 (4.76)
0.783 (19.89)
1.125 (25.80)
—
15-2528-2
Nickel-plated brass
0.078 (1.98)
—
0.562 (14.27)
0.656 (16.66)
15-966-2
0.562 (14.27)
—
15-124F1
15/32-32
Hexagon locknut
Hexagon facenut
—
Semi-lustre nickel-plated brass
Knurled facenut
Bright nickel-plated brass
—
0.066 (1.68)
Black cupric oxide-plated brass
Chamfered dress nut
15-1525-6
—
19-966-6
—
15-124F5
Brass nickel-plated brass
0.109 (2.77)
—
—
0.625 (15.88)
—
15-90
Bright nickel-plated brass
0.151 (3.84)
0.312 (7.92)
0.687 (17.45)
—
15-994-2
Standard knurl nut with shoulder
Nickel-plated brass
0.109 (2.77)
—
0.593 (15.06)
—
15-2534-14
Dress nut
Satin chrome-plated brass
0.125 (3.18)
—
0.562 (14.27)
—
15-2523-4
Black nylon
0.187 (4.75)
0.390 (9.91)
0.640 (16.26)
—
15-1048-3
Knurled dress nut
Chrome-plated brass
0.187 (4.75)
0.312 (7.92)
0.640 (16.26)
—
15-189-5
3/4-32
Hexagon facenut
Nickel-plated steel
0.093 (2.36)
—
0.937 (23.80)
1.078 (27.38)
15-1043
#8-40
Hexagon locknut with facenut
Nickel-plated steel
0.060 (1.52)
—
0.245 (6.22)
0.216 (5.49)
15-1047
Note
1
Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only. Minimum ordering quantity on all items is 100.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-31
4.8
4
4
4
4
4
Toggle Switches
Accessories
Mounting Washers and Locking Ring 1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Size
Description
Material
Thickness
Dim. “A”
For 15/32 bushing
Locking ring
Zinc-plated steel
0.040 (1.02)
Inside Diameter
Dim “B”
OD or Dimension
Across Flats
Dim. “C”
Dimension
Across Corners
Dim. “D”
Catalog
Number
0.475 (12.07)
0.718 (18.24)
—
29-761-5
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
Mounting Hardware
4
Hexagon Locknuts
or Facenuts
Knurled Nut
with Shoulder
Knurled Facenut
Chamfered Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-994-2
Knurled Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-189-5
4
4
4
4
4
B
C
C
A
A
Knurled Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-1048-3
Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-2523-4
4
Internal Tooth
Lockwasher
Plain Washer
Locking Ring
0.063 (1.60)
B
B
0.475
(12.07)
0.043 (1.09)
B
B
0.109 (2.77)
4
4
A
A
4
4
C
C
C
A
4
4
B
D
C
C
A
C
A
C
A
A
Note
1 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-32
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
0.031
(0.79)
0.031
(0.79)
0.050
(1.27)
0.719 (18.26)
Toggle Switches
Accessories
Decorator Facenuts
Product Selection
1
Replacement Terminal Screws
4
Product Selection
4
Type
Color
Catalog Number
Screw Size
Catalog Number 2
Knurled facenuts
Bright black
Bright clear
15-1048-3
15-1048-7
#5-40 x 1/8 in
11-1117
11-26
Bright black
Bright clear
15-1049-3
15-1049-7
#5-40 x 5/32 in
#5-40 x 3/16 in binding head
811-7206
#5-40 x 1/4 in binding head
811-14
Beveled facenuts
811-2
#6-32 x 1/4 in binding head
811-161
#6-32 x 1/4 in binding head
811-7248
Catalog Number 15-1048
#6-32 x 1/4 in pan head, brass
11-1893
#6-32 x 3/8 in binding head
811-129
#8-32 x 3/16 in binding head
11-1618
#8-32 x 1/4 in
11-1369
#8-32 x 1/4 in
811-408-2
#8-32 x 3/8 in binding head
11-1766
#8-32 x 3/8 in binding head
11-6074-4
#6-32 x 7/32 in binding head
11-6085-2
0.438 (11.13)
Dia. Hole
0.438 (11.13)
Dia. Hole
0.625
(15.88)
Dia.
0.625
(15.88)
Dia.
0.060
(1.63)
20˚
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering panel
enclosure
Behind panel mounting
Stainless-steel cup washer ensures proper seating of silicone
rubber seal
Seal withstands 20 psi water pressure
Cat. No. 32-341
0.072
0.082
0.467
Dia.
0.472
0.427
0.432
Silicone
Rubber
4
4
4
4
4
4
●
●
Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering lever to
bushing enclosure
Front panel mounting
Threaded mounting nut ensures proper assembly of silicon
rubber boot
Brass nut: 15/32-32 NS-2A
Black color
SW1RY3030
Dimensions—32-341
1/16-Inch Lettering
(located on angular surface)
4
Toggle Boot
●
Panel Seal
4
4
#6-32 x 3/16 in binding head
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog Number 15-1049
4.8
Product Selection
Mounting Description
Color
Catalog
Number
Front panel mounting
Molded in brass mounting nut
(15/32-32 NS-2A) ensures
proper assembly of silicon
rubber boot
Black
SW1RY3030
0.670
Dia.
0.650
Thickness of brushing
seal is reduced to 0.080
when mounted to panel
0.030
(0.80)
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0.940 (24.00)
0.120 (3.00)
Cupwasher
Stainless Steel
4
4
Dimensions—15/32-32 NS-2A
0.105
0.120
4
4
0.660
(16.70)
4
4
Ø0.643
(Ø16.34)
4
Ø0.330
(Ø8.40)
4
Inner Thread 15/32-32 NS-2A
4
Notes
1 Decorator facenuts for 15/32 in bushing switches, 15/32-32 thread.
2 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only.
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-33
4.8
4
Toggle Switches
Accessories
Indicating Plates
Product Selection—Indicating Plates for 15/32-Inch Bushing Mounted Switches
4
4
4
Keyway Location
Marking
Opposite
Keyway
Keyway
Side
Material
Finish
Catalog Number
Keyway on bottom
ON
OFF
0.032 in steel
Plain
30-5632
Statuary bronze
30-5632-3
Burnished nickel
30-5632-4
0.032 in brass
Black cupric oxide 1
30-2899-3
0.032 in steel
Statuary bronze
30-5632-7
Burnished nickel
30-5632-6
Burnished nickel
30-5632-11
4
4
RAD
4
RUN
START
HOT
COLD
30-5632-15
4
HI
LOW
30-5632-16
4
ON
STOP
FOR
REV
4
AUTO
TEST
30-2899-6
PUSH
START
30-2899-7
4
RUN
TEST
BLANK
BLANK
0.032 in steel
Burnished nickel
30-5632-8
ON
OFF
0.032 in steel
Burnished nickel
30-5632-13
OFF
ON
4
Keyway on side
4
Keyway on top
4
4
4
Keyway on top
PHO
0.032 in steel
30-5632-17
0.032 in steel
Burnished nickel
30-2899-2
30-2899-9
30-2899-8
T
B
OFF
ON
0.032 in steel
Burnished nickel
30-5632-12
30-5632-14
SET
RUN
30-2899-10
BLANK
RESET
O
I
I
O
30-2899-12
0.032 in steel
Burnished nickel
30-5632-23
30-5632-19
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches
Indicating Plate
ON
1
16
15 Dia.
32
1
32
OFF
1
11
32
5 Dia.
8
Note
1 White lettering.
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-34
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4.9
Toggle Switches
Technical Data
SinglePole
TwoPole
FourPole
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Terminal Identification
Toggle Circuit Diagrams
When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.
Circuit Letter
All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.
10
11
12
“Three Independent” ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram
For switch modified with “Three Independent” ON-ON-ON
special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect
wiring per instructions given below.
ON-ON-ON Special Circuit
Connection Points
Connect common to terminals
2
Connect circuit “A” to terminals
6
Connect circuit “B” to terminals
4
Connect circuit “C” to terminals
1
A
1PST
B
1PDT
C
2PST
D
2PDT
No. of
Poles
Circuit A
1 PDT
1
3
6
4
4
4
4
L
2PST
4
5
6
2 5 8 11
3 6 9 12
7 10
8 11
9 12
1 4
2 5
3 6
G3
1PST
4
M
2PST
2
4
4
1
3
4
2 4
4
1 3
4
N6
2PDT
4
4
4
P
1PDT
2
CENTER
Position
(Maintained)
Circuit B
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
H4
1PDT
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
Circuit Diagrams
4
6
4
Circuit C
1
Q7
2 Circuit
6
B
A
C
C
4
NC NO
H
G
NC
NO
4
4
Toggle Switch Type
Special General Purpose Toggle Circuits
Circuit Number
Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever
4
4
Center terminal and switch lever
A
Bulb
4
Momentary contact
B
7571
A
B
7555
4
Toggle Switch Legend
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever
7530
4
Legends
Legend
Schematic
4
K
1PDT
3
UP
Position
4
4
1
2
3
E
4PST 1
1
J
1PST
5
6
2
3
4
Schematic
I
2 Circuit 5
1
2
3
Circuit with Lever in …
3 ON
Independent
Circuit Letter
2
3
F
4PDT 2
Single-Pole
Schematic
4
Denotes mechanical contact portion
Notes
1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3 Dependent lamp.
4 Independent lamp.
5 Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two
circuits being controlled may be independent of each other.
6
For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.
4
4
4
4
A
4
B
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T4-35
Dimmers and Wipers
Slide Control
5.1
Paddle and Slide Controls
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
Paddle Control
V11-T5-2
V11-T5-2
V11-T5-3
V11-T5-3
5
5
5
Rotary Wipers
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-5
V11-T5-6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Rotary Wiper
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T5-1
5.1
5
Dimmers and Wipers
Paddle and Slide Controls
Contents
Paddle and Slide Controls
Description
5
Page
Paddle and Slide Controls
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
V11-T5-3
V11-T5-3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Product Description
Eaton’s unique family of
dimmer and wiper controls
are field proven to be the
market’s most dependable
controls. Although originally
designed for the heavy truck
market, applications in
various other types of
vehicles exist. Paddle and
slide versions are available
and both have the look, feel
and durability associated with
our controls. Bezels and
actuators are molded in a soft
matte finish. Illuminated and
non-illuminated versions are
available. Board-mounted
LEDs located behind a laseretched panel provide
illumination. Customized light
panel lettering and custom
pad printed bezels are also
available. Both dimmer
and wiper controls are
designed to complement the
NGR family of switches.
Note: Specific frame options are
available that allow product to
mount in NGR gang mount
system. Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative.
5
Catalog Number Selection
5
How To Order—Paddle and Slide Controls
5
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
5
5
5
Control Type
D = Dimmer
W = Wiper
Actuator Type
P = Paddle
S = Slide
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Application
Voltage
12 = 12V
24 = 24V
D
Amperage Rating
and Voltage 1
3
4
5
6
8
10
W
= 3A, 24V
= 4A, 12V
= 5A, 24V
= 6A, 12V
= 8A, 12V
= 10A, 12V
= Wiper
P 24
Bezel Print
Style
A = Style A
B = Style B
C = Style C
D = Style D
5 C
A
Connector Type
Packard No.
A = 12020398
B = 12015345
C = 174930-1
D = 12034295
E = Leads only
D
G
Connector and Leads
Only Detail
Dimmer connector
Dimmer and wiper connector
Dimmer connector
Wiper connector
Dimmer only
Bezel Print Style 4
PANEL
B
R
I
G
H
T
D
I
M
Code A
WIPER
W
I
P
E
R
O
F
F
W
A
S
H
PANEL
0
1
2
Code B
Code C
Code D
Notes
1 Amperage ratings for dimmers only.
2 Maximum dwell time describes the average time constant for delayed wiper activation.
3 Maximum nominal dwell.
4 Custom pad print available for bezel or button.
V11-T5-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Circuit Board 2
D = Dimmer
L = 18 sec. 3
S = 10 sec. 3
G
Y
R
X
LED Color
= Green
= Yellow
= Red
= Nonilluminated
5.1
Dimmers and Wipers
Paddle and Slide Controls
Technical Data and Specifications
5
Paddle and Slide Controls
Description
Specification
5
Ratings (dimmer only)
4, 6, 8, 10A at 14 Vdc
3, 5A at 28 Vdc
5
Mechanical life
100,000 operations, maximum
Operating temperature range
–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
5
Base material
High-grade thermoplastic molding material
Mounting means
Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
Mounting hole
Rectangular panel cutout: 1.734 x 0.867 in (44.00 x 22.00 mm)
5
Panel thickness
Paddle
0.030 to 0.190 in (0.762 x 4.80 mm)
5
Slide
5
0.030 to 0.080 in (0.762 x 2.03 mm)
Approximate weight
5
1.5 oz
5
Dimensions
5
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Paddle Control
1.960
(49.78)
R 0.156 Typ
(R 3.96)
5
B
R
I
G
H
T
D
I
M
Lettering to be white.
Lettering style to be
Helvetica Swiff Condensed 14 pt.
WIPER
PANEL
W
I
P
E
R
O
F
F
1.024
(26.01)
5
Slide Control
0.675
1.024
(17.15)
(26.01)
5
W
A
S
H
0.448
(11.38)
1.663
(42.24)
Symbol and lettering to be stamped in white.
“WIPER” and “WASH” lettering style
to be 12 pt. Univers 59.
OFF lettering to be 10 pt. Univers 59.
Custom lettering is also available.
0.100
(2.54)
50° ± 5°
0.214
(5.44)
1.332
(33.83)
1.582
(40.18)
5
Blue
0.454
(11.53)
0.100
(2.54)
5
0.800
(20.32)
1.019 ± 0.020
(25.88 ± 0.51)
1.718
(43.64)
5
R 0.080 Typ
(R 2.03)
R 0.090 Typ
(R 2.29)
0.857
(21.79)
2 Places
0.745
(18.92)
5
Black
1.965
(49.91)
See
Detail A
5
0.778 (19.76)
Travel
5
5
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
5
Black
0.320
(8.13)
White
Blue
Yellow
Terminal Identification:
Positive (+) (blue wire)
Negative (–) (black wire)
Load (yellow wire)
Positive (+) LED light (blue wire)
Washer (white wire) washer only
Negative (–) LED light (black wire)
1.650
(41.91)
5
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.127)
5
2.680
(68.07)
1.302
(33.07)
Yellow
5
Panel Opening
Blue
5
0.964 (24.49)
Ref
5
Black
Terminal Identification:
Positive (+) (blue wire)
Negative (–) (black wire)
Load (yellow wire)
Positive (+) LED light (blue wire)
Open position
Negative (–) LED light (black wire)
Detail A
Typ 2 Plcs
5
C of
Pivot
Point
5
5
5
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T5-3
5.2
5
Dimmers and Wipers
Rotary Wipers
Contents
Rotary Wiper
Description
5
Page
Rotary Wipers
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
V11-T5-5
V11-T5-6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Product Description
Features
The rotary wiper has been
designed to be a highly
durable rotary wiper control
for the transportation
industry. The RW200 series
wiper has four wiper control
5
positions via a rotating knob:
Off, Intermittent, Continuous
Low Speed and Continuous
High Speed. The device has a
washer function that
operates the washer pump
and wiper while the knob is
depressed.
●
●
Options
Load Dump Protection
●
The switch will
withstand a 120V load
dump per SAE J1455
Reverse Voltage Protection
●
The device will not be
damaged when exposed
to 12 Vdc for 5 minutes
5
5
Product Selection
5
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
5
Rotary Wiper Code Numbers and Letters
5
Series
Code
Voltage
Code
5
12064752
5
5
Packard
Connectors
12977042
RW
RW
12 Vdc
6294544 and 2977048
5
12A
12B
200
6288538
5
Code
12C
12D
Bushing Length in
Inches (mm)
Code
Catalog Number
0.261 (6.63)
A
RW20012AA
0.424 (10.77)
B
RW20012AB
0.261 (6.63)
A
RW20012BA
0.424 (10.77)
B
RW20012BB
0.261 (6.63)
A
RW20012CA
0.424 (10.77)
B
RW20012CB
0.261 (6.63)
A
RW20012DA
0.424 (10.77)
B
RW20012DB
5
5
5
5
5
V11-T5-4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
●
●
●
●
Variable bushing length
Variable spindle length
Choice of connectors
Pad printing on knob
Standards and
Certifications
Meets SAE standards J1455,
J1944 and J1988.
Dimmers and Wipers
Rotary Wipers
5.2
Technical Data and Specifications
5
Rotary Wipers
5
Description
Specification
Operating voltage range
9 Vdc to 16 Vdc
Continuous load rating
17A from –40° to 73°F (–40° to 23°C)
Derated to 5A at 185°F (85°C)
Wiper electromechanical life
50,000 cycles
Electrical cycle life
250,000 cycles in the Intermittent position
300,000 cycles combined in the Low and High positions
Operating temperature
–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Humidity rating
Device will operate properly at 98% humidity between –40° and 100°F (–40° and 38°C)
Mechanical shock
The switch will withstand a 3 ft drop on concrete
5
Vibration
The device will operate properly while being exposed to 133 hours of 1G rms vibration
along all three axes, sweeping from 5 Hz to 1500 Hz at one octave per minute
5
5
5
5
5
5
Connector Drawings
5
5
5
5
12064752
12977042
5
6288538
5
5
5
5
2977048
6294544
Circuit Continuity
Wire Terminations
Switch
Position
Circuit Continuity
Wire
Color
Switch Connections
Off
Open
Yellow
Motor low speed terminal
Intermittent
Yellow—Red and brown
White
Motor high speed terminal
Low speed
Yellow
Blue
Motor park terminal
High speed
White
Black
Ground
Brown
Brown
Washer pump
Red—Positive
Red
+12 Vdc (positive)
Washer
5
5
5
5
5
5
Black—Negative
5
5
5
5
5
5
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T5-5
5.2
5
5
Dimmers and Wipers
Rotary Wipers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
RW200 Series
5
5
Off/Park
20º
5
Washer
(Push In)
5
WIPER
WASHER
5
70º
1.176 +0.010 –0.025
(29.87 +0.25 –0.64)
Dia.
Fastest
Intermittent
Speed
20º Continuous
Low Speed
20º Ref
Continuous
Fast Speed
5
0.248 (6.30)
Dia.
EATON
5
Slowest
Intermittent
Speed
2.188
(55.57)
0.370 (9.40)
Flats
2.188
(55.57)
View B
5
1.358
(34.50)
5
0.609 +0.010 –0.015
(15.47 +0.25 –0.38)
5
0.424
(10.77)
3.029 +0.006 –0.010
(76.94 +0.15 –0.25)
0.099
(2.51)
5
2.230
(56.64)
1.805
(45.84)
5
5
5
Yellow
Lead
5
Blue Lead
3.335
(84.71)
Approx.
5
Black
Lead
5
White Lead
Red Lead
Brown Lead
4.505
(114.43)
Approx.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
V11-T5-6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons
AC Rated Pushbuttons
6.1
AC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
Illuminated AC/DC Rated Pushbuttons
V11-T6-2
V11-T6-2
V11-T6-2
V11-T6-3
V11-T6-4
V11-T6-5
6
6
6
6
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 580/581/586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 770/775 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
V11-T6-8
V11-T6-8
V11-T6-8
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-10
V11-T6-11
V11-T6-12
V11-T6-13
V11-T6-14
V11-T6-16
V11-T6-17
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-19
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T6-1
6.1
6
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
Contents
AC Rated
Description
6
Page
AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
6
V11-T6-3
V11-T6-4
V11-T6-5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Product Description
Features
These general-purpose, AC
rated, pushbutton switches
offer a wide variety of
configurations, button styles
and termination types. The
7835 and 7836 light-duty
series pushbutton switches
are AC only. They feature
slow-make/slow-break butttype contacts with a light
operating pressure that is
particularly suited to
instrumentation applications.
●
●
Circuits
●
1PST, 1PDT, 2PDT
●
Momentary action
Terminal Types
●
Screw terminals, brass
(furnished unassembled)
●
●
8410/8411 Series
– #5-40 x 3/16 in
(Cat. No. 811-7206)
●
8406/8440 Series
– #5-40 x 5/32 in screws
(Cat. No. 11-26)
●
Solder lug, brass silverplated
6
6
6
6
8448 Series
– #6-32 x 3/16 in
binding head screws
(Cat. No. 811-2)
●
Hardware supplied
●
One hexagon locknut
(Cat. No. 15-192) and
one bright nickel-plated
knurled facenut
(Cat. No. 15-124F1)
●
8411/8418 Series has
a bright nickel-plated
hexagon facenut
(Cat. No. 15-966-2)
●
All hardware is furnished
unassembled
●
Other mounting types
are flush, nest and
snap-in
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Standards and
Certifications 1
●
●
●
UL® Recognized
CSA® Certified
RoHS 2
Notes
1
Except where noted.
2
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
6.1
Product Selection
6
Non-Illuminated
6
Light-Duty, Momentary Contact
Flush Mounted
Flush
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
1PST
Contacts
Circuit
Number 1
Button
Construction
Color
NC
A
Nylon
Black
Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)
Typical Max.
Operating
Force
Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
Catalog
“A” in Inches (mm)
Number
0.468 (11.89)
0.7 lbs 3
Flush
8406K1
0.453 (11.50)
0.7 lbs 3
Flush
8410K1
6
6
Screw Terminals
1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc
3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc
Snap-in
6
6
Snap-in Mounted
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Color
Typical Max.
Operating
Force
Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
Catalog
“A” in Inches (mm)
Number
Nylon
White
0.375 (9.53)
—
Snap-in
8423K1 5
Nylon
White
0.375 (9.53)
—
Snap-in
8424K1 5
Button
Construction
NC
A
NO
A
Contacts
6
Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)
Circuit
Number 1
6
Spade Terminals (0.250 in)
3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc
Bushing
1PST
6
Bushing Mounted
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Contacts
6
Color
Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)
Typical Max.
Operating
Force
Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
Catalog
“A” in Inches (mm)
Number
Nylon
Black
0.250 (6.35)
1.5 lbs 3
0.250 (6.35)
8411K5
6
Nylon
Black
0.406 (10.31)
1.5 lbs 3
0.468 (11.89)
8411K8
Metal
—
0.296 (7.52)
2.5 lbs
0.468 (11.89)
8440K2 5
6
A
Metal
—
0.312 (7.92)
—
0.562 (14.27)
7835K11A 6
A
Nylon
(snap-on)
Black
—
—
0.562 (14.27)
7835K11C
Red
—
—
0.562 (14.27)
7835K11D
A
Metal
—
0.312 (7.92)
—
0.562 (14.27)
7836K11A 6
A
Nylon
(snap-on)
Black
—
—
0.562 (14.27)
7836K11C 6
Red
—
—
0.562 (14.27)
7836K11D 6
6
0.406 (10.31)
1.5 lbs 3
0.468 (11.89)
8411K7
0.375 (9.53)
1.5 lbs 4
0.468 (11.89)
8411K12
6
Button
Circuit
Number 1 Construction
6
Solder Lugs
3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc
1PST
NC
3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc
1PST
NC
5A, 12 Vdc,
3A, 125 Vac 2
1PST
NO
3A, 125 Vac
1A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac
1PST
NC
3A, 125 Vac
1A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac
1PST
NO
A
A
A
Screw Terminals
3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc
5A, 12 Vdc,
3A, 125 Vac 2
3A, 125 Vac
1A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac
1PST
1PST
NC
A
NO
NO
A
Nylon
Black
NO
NC
1PST
NO
0.296 (7.52)
2.5 lbs
0.468 (11.89)
8440K3
Metal
—
0.312 (7.92)
—
0.562 (14.27)
7836K13A
0.312 (7.92)
—
0.562 (14.27)
7835K12A
Metal
—
0.312 (7.92)
—
0.562 (14.27)
7836K12A
Spade Terminals (0.250 in)
1PST
1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc
3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 125 Vac
1PST
1PST
NO
A
NC
A
NO
NC
NO
A
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Red
Black
Black
4
0.250 (6.35)
1.5 lbs
0.406 (10.31)
1.5 lbs 3
0.250 (6.35)
8411K13
0.468 (11.89)
8411K10
6
6
5
6
6
0.375 (9.53)
1.5 lbs 4
0.468 (11.89)
8411K11 5
0.250 (6.35)
1.5 lbs
0.250 (6.35)
8418K1 5
0.406 (10.31)
1.5 lbs
0.468 (11.89)
8418K12 5
Notes
1 For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18.
2 UL and CSA Listing not applicable.
3 To change operating pressure, refer to your local Eaton Sales Representative.
4 Operating pressure cannot be changed.
5 Combination spade and solder lug terminal.
6 Items are normally in distributor stock.
7 Standard length is 6 in (152.40 mm), stripped 0.625 in (15.88 mm).
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
6
6
—
A
6
6
Metal
Wire Leads 7
3/4A, 125 Vac
1A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac
6
5
A
1PST
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-3
6.1
6
6
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
Non-Illuminated
Medium-Duty, Momentary Contact
One-Hole
6
One-Hole Mounted
Poles
and
Throw
Rating
6
15A, 125 Vac
1PST
10A, 250 Vac
1/3 hp, 125–250 Vac
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
15A, 125 Vac, NO
10A, 125 Vac, NC
10A, 250 Vac, NO
5A, 250 Vac, NC
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1/4 hp, 125 Vac
1PDT
NO
A
Metal
—
B
Metal
B
Typical Max.
Operating
Force
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
2PST
NO
15A, 125 Vac
1PST
10A, 250 Vac
1/3 hp, 125–250 Vac
NO
15A, 125 Vac, NO
10A, 125 Vac, NC
10A, 250 Vac, NO
5A, 250 Vac, NC
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1/4 hp, 125 Vac
1PDT
NO, NC
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
2PST
Technical Data and Specifications
6
AC Rated
0.531 (13.49)
0.9 lbs
0.687 (17.45)
8444K3
0.250 (6.35)
0.9 lbs
0.343 (8.71)
8444K4
—
0.531 (13.49)
2.0 lbs
0.687 (17.45)
8434K2
Bakelite
Black
0.531 (13.49)
2.0 lbs
0.687 (17.45)
8435K2
C
Metal
—
0.250 (6.35)
—
0.343 (8.71)
8448K2 2
A
Metal
—
0.531 (13.49)
0.9 lbs
0.687 (17.45)
8444K2
B
Metal
—
0.531 (13.49)
2.0 lbs
0.687 (17.45)
8434K1
B
Bakelite
Black
0.531 (13.49)
2.0 lbs
0.687 (17.45)
8435K1
NO
C
Metal
—
0.250 (6.35)
—
0.343 (8.71)
8448K1 2
Description
Specification
Ratings
See Product Selection tables on Page V11-T6-3 and the table above.
Contact material
3–6A rated
Movable, silver-plated copper
Stationary, silver-plated copper
10–15A rated
Movable, silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary, copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
6
Wire leads
6
18 gauge, 6 in (152 mm) long, skinned 0.75 in (19 mm)
Lengths beyond 6 in (152 mm) are additional charge
Mounting means—One-hole mount
6
Threaded bushing—0.468 in dia. 32 threads/inch (11.90 mm)
Keyway—0.068 W x 0.035 D in (1.73 W x 0.89 D mm); provides anti-rotation feature
Keyway on 7835/7836 Series is 0.080 W x 0.040 D in (2.03 W x 1.01 D mm)
Operating temperature range
0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
6
6
6
Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
Catalog
“A” in Inches (mm)
Number
NO, NC
6
6
Color
Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)
Spade Terminals (0.250 in)
6
6
Button
Construction
Screw Terminals
6
6
Contacts
Circuit
Number 1
Notes
1
For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18.
2
UL and CSA Listing not applicable.
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
6.1
Dimensions
6
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.312
(7.92)
6
8410
7835K12A
Keyway
0.080–0.085 W x 0.040–0.047 D
(2.03–2.16 W x 1.02–1.19 D)
6
1.000
(25.40)
0.562
(14.27)
0.625
(15.88)
0.312
(7.92)
0.562
(14.27)
6
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
6
B
0.780
(19.81)
1.180
(29.97)
0.230 (5.84)
Stroke
0.310
(7.87)
6
1.610 (40.89)
1.500 (38.10)
0.060 0.250
(1.52) (6.35)
1.100 (27.94)
1.060 (26.92)
0.090 (2.29)
Dia.
2 Holes
0.060
(1.52)
6
8411K5 and 8411K13
0.250
(6.35)
0.150 (3.81)
2 Holes
6
0.650
(16.51)
Dia.
1.060
(26.92)
Dia.
0.310
(7.87)
6
0.290 (7.37)
Dia. Button
1.120
(28.57)
8406
1.370
(34.80) 0.840
(21.34)
1.870
(47.50)
6
B
6.000
(152.40)
0.812
(20.62)
6
1.870
(47.50)
1.500
(38.10)
0.469 (11.89)–32 TPI
0.484
(12.29)
6
0.150 (3.81)
Mounting Holes
0.343
(8.71)
6
6
1.250
(31.75)
6
0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)
1.000
(25.40)
6
6
0.250
(6.35)
Spade Terminal
Screw Type Terminal
6
6
8411K11 and 8411K12
8411K7 and 8411K8
0.460 (11.68) Dia.
0.310 (7.87) Dia.
0.040 (1.02)
0.180 (4.57)
6
0.070
(1.78)
0.260 (6.60)
Stroke
6
B
B
6
0.460 (11.68)
0.090
(2.29)
0.060
(1.52)
2.090
(53.09)
1.250
(31.75)
1.950 (49.53)
1.840 (46.74)
1.070 (27.18)
1.010 (25.65)
0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)
0.032
(0.76)
Screw Type Terminals
2–#5/40 Binding
Head Screw
0.340
(8.64)
0.032
(0.76)
0.340
(8.64)
6
6
0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)
6
Screw Type Terminals
#5/40 x 0.188 (4.57)
Large Binding
Head Screw
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T6-5
6.1
6
6
6
6
6
6
AC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8411K10 and 8418K12
0.310 (7.87)
Dia.
8423 and 8424
0.340 (8.64)
Stroke
0.040 (1.02) Max.
Pre-Travel to Break Circuit
0.460
(11.68)
0.850 (21.59)
Dia.
0.370 (9.40)
Extension
0.030
(0.76)
0.670
(17.02)
Dia.
0.370
0.300 (9.40)
(7.62)
0.950
(24.13)
0.469 (11.91) 2.120
(53.85)
1.270 Dia. –32
(32.26) Threads
per Inch
6
6
Pushbuttons
0.560
(14.22)
Hex
1.350
(34.29)
0.850
(21.59)
Dia.
0.340
(8.64)
0.240
(6.10)
0.340
(8.64)
0.740 (18.80)
Dia. max.
Note: Use 0.780 (19.81) dia. hole
on 0.060 (1.52) thick panel.
0.250
(6.35)
6
6
6
8418K1
0.220 (5.59) Stroke
0.310 (7.87)
and Extension
Dia.
0.469 (11.89)
Dia. –32 1.750
1.270 Threads (44.45)
(32.26) per Inch
6
0.030
(0.76)
6
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
0.560
(14.22)
Hex
0.250
(6.35)
0.700
(17.78)
0.230
(5.95)
0.300
(7.62)
0.340
(8.64)
0.670 (17.02)
Dia.
0.520
(13.21)
Stroke
0.620
(15.75)
B
6
6
0.100
(2.54)
0.040
(1.02)
0.040 (1.02) Max.
Pre-Travel to Break Circuit
6
6
8434K2 and 8435K2
0.030
(0.76)
Ref
0.970
(24.64)
1.210
(30.73)
3–#6-32 x 3/16 LG
Binding Head Screw
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
6.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8440
6
8448K1
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
0.230 (5.84) Dia.
0.030 (0.76)
to 0.070 (1.78)
Pre-Travel
0.030 (0.76)
Button
Depressed
0.290
(7.37)
0.460
(11.68)
6
0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel to
Make Contact
0.250
(6.35)
Stroke
6
0.300 (7.62) Dia.
6
0.469 (11.91) Dia.
–32 Threads per Inch
6
#15-32 Threads
0.340
(8.64)
0.680
(17.27)
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
1.200
(30.48)
1.310
(33.27)
0.620
(15.75)
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
6
6
0.750
(19.05)
6
6
8442 and 8444 (Screw Terminals)
0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel
to Make Contact
8448K2
0.469 (11.91) Dia. –32
Threads per Inch
B
0.940
(23.88)
1.210
(30.99)
0.260
(6.60)
0.340
(8.64)
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
0.250 (6.35)
Stroke
6
0.469 (11.91) Dia.
–32 Threads per Inch
0.300 (7.62)
Dia.
0.620
(15.75)
A
6
0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel to
Make Contact
6
6
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
0.760
(19.30)
1.060
(26.92)
1.320
(33.53)
6
6
6
0.750
(19.05)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T6-7
6.2
6
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Contents
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Description
6
Page
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-14
V11-T6-16
V11-T6-17
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-19
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Product Description
Eaton offers a wide range of
pushbutton switches for
standard industry applications
such as appliances,
electronics, medical and test
instrumentation, office
equipment and many other
commercial applications.
A variety of options are
available such as illuminated
and non-illuminated versions,
colored lens caps, lamp
styles and mounting styles.
6
Each pushbutton series
offers a matching indicator
for a consistent look. See the
Product Overview tables to
quickly identify the required
product. Then, refer to the
Catalog Number Selection
and Product Selection tables
to determine the catalog
number.
6
6
6
Product Selection Guide
6
General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated
Series
206/208
Page
220/221/224
Page
231/234
Page
Standards and
Certifications 1
●
●
●
UL Recognized
CSA Certified
RoHS 2
Notes
1
Except where noted.
2
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
580/581/586
Page
6
Pushbutton
Selection—Switch
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-10
6
Pushbutton
Selection—Indicator
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-10
6
Pushbutton Cap
Selection
V11-T6-13
V11-T6-13
V11-T6-13
V11-T6-13
6
Circuit Diagram Letter
(See Page V11-T6-18)
K, N
K, N
K, N
J, L, M
6
Series
6
Pushbutton
Selection—Switch
V11-T6-11
V11-T6-12
V11-T6-12
V11-T6-12
6
Pushbutton Cap
Selection
V11-T6-11
V11-T6-12
V11-T6-12
V11-T6-12
6
Pushbutton
Selection—Indicator
V11-T6-13
V11-T6-13
V11-T6-13
V11-T6-13
6
Circuit Diagram Letter
(See Page V11-T6-18)
Q
K, N
K, N
J, L
770/775
Page
810/815
Page
820/825
Page
6
V11-T6-8
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
860/861/845
Page
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
6.2
Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234
6
6
6
Catalog Number Selection
6
How To Order—Series 206/220 1 and 221 1/231 1, Switch
6
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Base Prefix
206 = 206 Series
illuminated
220 = 220 Series
non-illuminated
221 = 221 Series
illuminated
231 = LED display
206
Product Type
K = Switch
K 1
1
9
Terminations
1 = Solder
Mounting 3
Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
3 = Full barriers
Number of
Poles
1 = 1PST
2 = 2PDT
Pushbutton Style
220 and 221
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M = Matte
Contact
Material
8 = Silver
9 = Gold
6 = 2PDT 2
1 2
D
Full/Top
Lens Color
All Series
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4
03
05
S
Bottom
Lens Color
206 Series Only
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4
30
Pushbutton Height
206
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
split
220 and 221/231
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
6
6
Lamp
206 7/220 and 221
6
Incandescent 5
Example:
30 28-3158
231
LED lamps 6
Example:
02 Red, 5 Vdc
6
6
6
6
6
6
231
M = Matte
6
How To Order—Series 208/224 1/234 1, Indicator
6
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Base Prefix
208 = 208 Series
indicators
224 = 224 Series
indicators
234 = 234 Series
indicators
Product Type
L = Indicator
Terminations
1 = Solder
208
L
1 2
Mounting 3
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
3 = Full barriers
Pushbutton Style
208/224
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M = Matte
D
03
Full/Top
Lens Color
All Series
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4
05
S
Bottom
Lens Color
208 Series Only
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4
30
6
6
Pushbutton Height
208 7
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
split
224/234
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
Lamp
208/224
Incandescent 5
Example:
30 28-3158
234
LED lamps 6
Example:
02 Red, 5 Vdc
6
6
6
6
6
6
234
M = Matte
6
6
Notes
1 Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code.
2 Pole one is silver, pole two is gold.
3 Refer to Page V11-T6-16 for barrier information.
4 Not available with lighted display.
5 Use two-digit item number, 30–37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
6 Use two-digit item number, 01–19, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
7 Accepts two bulbs
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T6-9
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Series 580/581/586
6
6
6
6
6
Catalog Number Selection
6
How To Order—Series 580/581, Switch
6
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
581
K
1
3
9 1
0
T
6
6
6
Base Prefix
580 = 580 Series
non-illuminated
581 = 581 Series
illuminated
Product Type
K = Switch
6
6
6
Mounting 1
0 = Chamfered bezel
1 = Flat bezel
Pushbutton Style
M = Matte
T = Translucent
Example:
Base Prefix
586= 586 Series
indicators
Product Type
L = Indicator
586
Terminations
1 = Solder
L
1
0
T 03
Mounting 1
0 = Chamfered bezel
1 = Flat bezel
Pushbutton Style
M = Matte
T = Translucent
6
6
6
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 = Gray
21 = Black 2
Pushbutton
Height
A = 0.270 in
(6.9 mm)
B = 0.330 in
(8.4 mm)
C = 0.440 in
(11.2 mm)
Lamp
Incandescent 3
Example:
30 28-3158
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
6
6
B 30
How To Order—Series 586, Indicator
6
6
1 = Solder
Contact Material
5 = Silver plate
9 = Gold plate
6
6
Terminations
Number of Poles
1 = 1PST NO
2 = 1PST NC
3 = 2PST NO
4 = 2PST NC
5 = 2PST NO/NC
6
6
Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.
03
B 30
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 = Gray
21 = Black 2
Notes
1
Flush with bezel.
2
Not available with lighted display.
3
Use two-digit item number, 30–37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-10
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Pushbutton
Height
A = 0.270 in
(6.9 mm)
B = 0.330 in
(8.4 mm)
C = 0.440 in
(11.2 mm)
Lamp
Incandescent 3
Example:
30 28-3158
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Series 770/775
6
6
6
6
Catalog Number Selection
6
How To Order—Series 770 1, Switch
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Base Prefix
770 = 770 Series
illuminated
770
Product Type
K
1
1
9 1
Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.
K = Switch
1
M 03
Terminations
1 = Solder
Number of
Poles
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT
Mounting 2
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
Pushbutton Style
Contact
Material
8 = Silver
9 = Gold
M = Matte
6
01 G 80
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
Pushbutton Height
F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
full
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
full
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
full 2 3
S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
split
Lamp
Incandescent 4
Neon 5
Example:
80 28-3157
Base Prefix
775 = 775 Series
indicator
Product Type
L = Indicator
Terminations
1 = Solder
1
1
2
Mounting
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
Pushbutton Style
M = Matte
M 03
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
01 G
6
6
6
6
6
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
775 L
6
6
How To Order—Series 775 1, Indicator
Example:
6
80
Pushbutton Height
F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
full
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
full
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
full 2 3
S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
split
6
6
6
6
Lamp
Incandescent 4
Neon 5
Example:
80 28-3157
6
6
6
6
6
6
Notes
1 Full or split cap style available.
2 Flush with bezel.
3 Not available with lighted display.
4 Use two-digit item number, 51–59, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
5 Use two-digit item number, 80 or 81, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
6
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T6-11
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825
6
6
6
6
6
Catalog Number Selection
6
How To Order—Series 860 and 861/810/820, Switch 1
6
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
6
6
6
6
6
6
Base Prefix
860= 860 Series
non-illuminated
861= 861 Series
illuminated
810= 810 Series
illuminated
820= 820 Series
illuminated
Product Type
6
6
Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.
6
6
6
1
Number of
Poles
860 and 861
1 = 1PDT
3 = 2PST
Mounting 3
Contact Material
8 = Silver
9 = Gold
6 = 2PDT/2PST 2
6
6
03 B 02
Pushbutton Height
860 and 861
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7
810/820
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
Full/Top Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 = Gray
21 = Black 4
Lamp
860 and 861
Incandescent 5
Example:
02 28-3154-2
810
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Example:
93 Red, 20 mA
820
Incandescent 5
Neon 8
LED 6
Example:
70 28-3156
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Base Prefix
845= 861 Series
indicator
815= 810 Series
indicator
825= 820 Series
indicator
Product Type
L = Indicator
Terminations
1 = Solder
845 L
Mounting 3
845
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
815/825
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
1
2
D 03 B
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 = Gray
21 = Black 4
30
Pushbutton Height
845
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7
815/825
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
Pushbutton Style
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M = Matte
T = Translucent
6
6
D
Pushbutton Style
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M = Matte
T = Translucent
860 and 861
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
810/820
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
820
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT NC
2
How To Order—Series 845/815/825, Indicator 1
6
6
9 1
Terminations
6
6
3
1 = Solder
810
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT
6
6
K
K = Switch
6
6
861
Notes
1
Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code.
2
Pole one is silver, pole two is gold.
3
Flush with bezel.
4
Not available with lighted display.
5
Use two-digit item number, 02–14, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
6
Use two-digit item number, 93–97, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
7
Not available with lighted display. Available only on “M.”
8
Use two-digit item number, 70, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
V11-T6-12
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Lamp
815
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Example: 30 28-3158
825
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Neon 8
Example: 93 Red, 20 mA
845
Incandescent 5
Example: 37 28-3158-8
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps
6
6
Series 206/220/231 and Series 580/770/810/820/849
6
6
6
6
Catalog Number Selection
6
How To Order—Series 206/220/231, Pushbutton Caps
6
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Base Prefix
206 = 2 lamp display
(Series 206/208) 1
220 = Non-illuminated
Series 220 and illuminated
Series 221, 224 and 234
231 = LED display on
Series 231 and 234
Product Type
P = Pushbutton
206 P
C
03
Display Legend/Style
C = Clear cap and color
insert, transmitted color
D = Deadfront, smoky gray
cap and color insert
F = Filtered color, white cap and
color insert 2
M = Matte, no insert, transmitted
color
04
6
S
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4
Cap Height 5
A = 0.19 in (4.8 mm),
full
S = 0.19 in (4.8 mm),
split
Base Prefix
580 = Series 580, 581, 586 6
770 = Series 770, 775 3
810 = Series 810, 815
820 = Series 820, 825
849 = Series 845, 860, 861
Product Type
P = Pushbutton
6
6
6
6
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
580 P
6
6
How To Order—Series 580/770/810/820/849, Pushbutton Caps
Example:
6
C
03
Display Legend/Style
C = Clear cap and color insert,
transmitted color 7
D = Deadfront, smoky gray
cap and color insert
F = Filtered color, white cap
and color insert 7
M = Matte, no insert,
transmitted color
T = Transmitted color, smooth
surface, solid color
04 B
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
21 = Black 4
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
21 = Black 4
6
6
Cap Height
5
580
A = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
B = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
C = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
770
F = Full, 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
S = Split, 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
810/820
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
849
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm)
Notes
1 For a high degree of illumination, a full cap may be used with two lamp devices.
2 Available only with colors red, green, yellow and blue.
3 Available in matte only.
4 Not available for lighted display.
5 Measured from panel of top of pushbutton cap.
6 Available in translucent and matte only.
7 For two lamps, two colored inserts with divider.
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T6-13
6.2
6
6
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Lamp Selection
Incandescent Lamps
Bi-Pin Base for 800 Series
6
To Order Lamp
Item Number 1 Separately
ASA Lamp Number
Designed Volts
Design Amps
Brightness (MSCP) 2
Brightness (Lumens)
Lab Average Life (Hours) 3
6
02
7361
5
0.06
0.05
0.63
100,000
03
28-3154-3
7945
6
0.04
0.03
0.38
10,000
6
07
28-3154-7
7381
6.3
0.20
0.40
5.03
50,000
08
28-3154-8
7371
12
0.04
0.12
1.51
10,000
09
28-3154-9
7330
14
0.08
0.50
6.29
750
10
28-3154-10
7382
14
0.08
0.30
3.77
50,000
6
28-3154-2
6
11
28-3154-11
7370
18
0.04
0.15
1.89
10,000
12
28-3154-12
7327
28
0.04
0.34
4.27
7,000
6
13
28-3154-13
7387
28
0.04
0.30
3.77
25,000
14
28-3154-14
7876
28
0.06
0.34
4.27
25,000
6
Midget Flange Base for 770 Series
6
To Order Lamp
Item Number 1 Separately
ASA Lamp Number
Designed Volts
Design Amps
Brightness (MSCP) 2
Brightness (Lumens)
Lab Average Life (Hours) 3
6
51
28-3155-2
345
6
0.04
0.03
0.38
10,000
54
28-3155-5
394
12
0.04
0.12
1.51
10,000
6
55
28-3155-6
330
14
0.08
0.50
6.29
750
56
28-3155-7
382
14
0.08
0.30
3.77
50,000
6
57
28-3155-8
370
18
0.04
0.15
1.89
10,000
58
28-3155-9
327
28
0.04
0.34
4.27
7,000
6
59
28-3155-10
387
28
0.04
0.30
3.77
25,000
6
Subminiature Wedge Base for 200 and 500 Series
To Order Lamp
Item Number 1 Separately
ASA Lamp Number
Designed Volts
Design Amps
Brightness (MSCP) 2
Brightness (Lumens)
Lab Average Life (Hours) 3
30
28-3158
56
5
0.115
0.15
1.89
20,000
6
31
28-3158-2
79
6
0.20
0.60
7.92
1,000
32
28-3158-3
84
6.3
0.04
0.03
0.38
20,000
6
33
28-3158-4
86
6.3
0.20
0.40
5.03
20,000
34
28-3158-5
18
14
0.04
0.13
1.63
5,000
6
35
28-3158-6
73
14
0.08
0.30
3.77
15,000
36
28-3158-7
85
28
0.04
0.30
3.77
7,000
6
37
28-3158-8
17
28
0.06
0.65
8.17
5,000
6
6
6
Notes
1 Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators.
2
Standard tolerance for MSCP is ±25%.
3
Average life is for AC operation. DC life will be approximately 50% less. Operating incandescent lamps at 5–10% below rated voltage will generally increase lamp life 200–400%.
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-14
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
6.2
Neon Lamps 1
6
T 1-3/4 Bi-Pin Base Neon Lamp for All 800 Series “Shorty” Switches and Indicators 2
External
Resistance
Required
Ignition Voltage
DC
Average
Useful Life
(Hours)
AC
DC
Bulb Size
Lamp Length
Lead Length
150
1.5
25,000
47K (1/4 W)
95
135
T-2
0.60
0.25
CLC Lamp
Number
Circuit Volts
AC
70
7A1H
105–125
28-3156
6
Nominal
Current MA
Item
To Order Lamp
Number 3 Separately
6
6
T 1-3/4 Midget Flange Base Neon Lamps for All 700 Series Switches and Indicators 2
To Order Lamp
Item
Number 3 Separately
CLC Lamp
Number
Circuit Volts
AC
DC
Nominal
Current MA
Average
Useful Life
(Hours)
80
28-3157
A1H
105–125
150
1.5
25,000
35K (1/4 W)
None
95
135
T-2
0.67
81
28-3157-2
C-24
105–125
150
4.2
8,000
None
35K
95
135
T-2
0.67
External
Resistance
Required
Built-In
Resistance
AC
DC
Bulb Size
Maximum
Overall Length
Ignition Voltage
6
6
LEDs for Series 231 through 235 Switches and Indicators
Voltage 5
Vdc
6
5 Vdc
Yellow
Green
6
6
LEDs are sold installed only.
Red
6
6
LED Lamps 4
Color
6
Without Diode
Protection
Item Number
With Diode
Protection
Item Number
01
11
02
12
15 Vdc
03
13
Vdc 6
04
14
5 Vdc
05
15
15 Vdc
06
16
Vdc 6
07
17
5 Vdc
08
18
15 Vdc
09
19
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
T 1-3/4 Wire LEDs for All 800 Series Switches and Indicators
Luminous Intensity (MCD)
Item Number 3 Color
Forward
Current
(MA) 5
Minimum
93
Red
20
95
Green
96
97
Typical
Forward
Voltage (V)
Typical
Diffused or
Undiffused
6
80
160
1.7
Undiffused
20
80
160
1.7
Undiffused
6
Yellow
20
80
160
1.7
Undiffused
Amber
20
80
160
1.7
Undiffused
6
6
Notes
1 Neon lamps are not recommended for use with colored caps or inserts, especially those colored green or blue.
2 Recommended external series resistor values shown for indicated average useful life are for lamp and resistor
combinations used across 110–125 Vac, 1/4 W, ±10% tolerance.
3 Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators.
4 For use with clear or white cap only.
5 5 Vdc and 15 Vdc include internal current limiting resistor. Other voltages available—contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
6 External current limiting required. User must include in circuit—to give current of 20 mA to LED.
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T6-15
6.2
6
6
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Mounting Barriers Ordering Guide
Catalog Number Example: 200B1
6
When switches are individually mounted, add 0.10 in (2.54 mm) per switch to the appropriate
bezel dimension. When switches are gang mounted, add 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to the appropriate
bezel dimension for each switch mounted plus an additional 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to compensate
for gang mounting.
6
Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers 12
6
6
Product
Series
200
Product
Type
Barrier
Code
B
Barrier Type and
Description
End—Short
Code
3
1
6
Center—Short 3
2
6
End—Long 4
3
6
Center—Long 4
4
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
6
6
6
Legending
All legend markings are pad printed in accordance with the limitations below. Standard markings
are of condensed gothic type, 1/8 in high characters, with white letters on blue, red and green
translucent pushbuttons and black letters on white, yellow, orange and all filtered pushbuttons.
6
Legending
6
Pushbutton Size
Standard Pad Print
Limitations
6
1/2 in square pushbuttons
2 lines, 4 characters per line
5/8 in square pushbuttons—full legend
3 lines, 6 characters per line
6
5/8 in square pushbuttons—split legend
2 lines, 6 characters per line
6
3/4 in square pushbuttons
3 lines, 7 characters per line
3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton—full legend
3 lines, 9 characters per line
3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton—split legend
2 lines, 9 characters per line
6
6
Accessories
6
These snap-on pushbutton caps are made of molded plastic
for use with grooved style switches. They are ordered
separately for user assembly.
6
Snap-On Pushbutton Caps—Standard
6
6
6
6
6
6
Button Diameter
in Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
Black molded
0.625 (15.88)
53-3338
Red molded
0.625 (15.88)
53-3338-2
Description
Notes
1 The full guard barrier is molded as an integral part of the switch body and is specified as a part of the complete switch catalog number.
2 An end barrier is attached to each side of housing. The center barrier is used between devices when gang mounting in a slot array.
3 For use with square devices and short side of rectangular devices.
4 For use with long side of rectangular devices. Use a center—long between switches if gang mounting.
6
6
6
V11-T6-16
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
6.2
Technical Data and Specifications
6
General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated
6
Series
206/208
220/221/224
231/234
580/581/586
Ratings—
Silver Contacts
Gold Contacts
5A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.1A at 125 Vac/Vdc
5A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc
0.1A at 125 Vac/Vdc
5A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc
0.1A at 125 Vac/Vdc
Silver or Gold: 1A at 125 Vac
Gold-plated contacts for low level
Action
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Switch Circuitry
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
2-independent lamp circuits
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
Double break
1PST or 2PST
6
Termination Types
0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm)
0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 1
0.02 x 0.110 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 1
0.01 x 0.11 in (0.31 x 2.79 mm) 1
6
Pushbuttons
0.62 x 1.00 in (15.87 x 25.40 mm)
Rectangular
Full or horizontal split lens
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.63 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.63 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.50 in (12.70 mm)
Square
3 heights above panel E 3
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
Mounting
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Choice of two bezel styles:
Chamfered or Flat
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
One rectangular LED flush with cap
Various voltages available
Diode protection available
Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
Pushbutton Travel
0.19 in (2.29 mm)
0.19 in (2.29 mm)
0.19 in (2.29 mm)
0.17 in (4.32)
6
Series
770/775
810/815
820/825
860/861/845
6
Ratings—
Silver Contacts
Gold Contacts
10.5A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc
3A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc
3A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc
6A at 125 Vac or 3A at 250 Vac
0.25A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc
Action
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Switch Circuitry
1PDT or 2PDT (2 circuit)
2-independent lamp circuits
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
Double break
1PST or 2PST, NO
Termination Types
0.02 x 0.125 in (0.25 x 3.18 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed
0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed
0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed
0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1
Pushbuttons
0.73 x 0.97 in (18.54 x 24.64 mm)
Rectangular
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.75 x 1 in (19.05 x 25.40 mm)
Rectangular
2 heights above panel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.75 in (19.05 mm)
0.62 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Horizontal split legend
(indicator only)
3 heights above bezel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
Panel mounting retained by molded
sleeve and nut
May be individually mounted
or gang mounted in horizontal
or vertical rows
Panel thickness from 0.03 to 0.25 in
(0.76 to 6.35 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap mount available
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Lamps
Accepts two T 1-3/4 midget flange
base lamps
Incandescent or neon
Front relampable
One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
6
Pushbutton Travel
0.22 in (5.59 mm)
0.22 in (5.59 mm)
0.22 in (5.59 mm)
0.22 in (5.59 mm)
6
Lamps
Mounting
Square
2 heights above panel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Notes
1 Terminations are suitable for solder or female 110 connectors. Series 770: Solder only.
2 See Engraving and Hot Stamping table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information.
3 See Product Selection tables on Pages V11-T6-9–V11-T6-12 for more information.
4 See Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
6
6
6
V11-T6-17
6.2
6
6
SinglePole
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
1
2
3
6
6
6
TwoPole
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
FourPole
Circuit Letter
6
All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.
Momentary contact
C
2PST
2
3
D
2PDT
1
2
3
E
4PST 1
F
4PDT 2
Legend
Rocker Switch Type
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever
Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever
Center terminal and switch lever
Bulb
Denotes mechanical contact portion
Notes
1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3 Dependent lamp.
4 Independent lamp.
5 Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being
controlled may be independent of each other.
6 For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.
Schematic
I
2 circuit 5
1
4
3
6
2
4
1
3
J
1PST
1
2
3
K
1PDT
5
6
L
2PST
4
5
6
2 5 8 11
3 6 9 12
7 10
8 11
9 12
1 4
2 5
3 6
G3
1PST
4
6
6
Pushbutton Legend
Circuit Letter
2
3
B
1PDT
6
6
Schematic
A
1PST
6
6
10
11
12
When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.
Pushbutton Circuit Diagrams
6
6
7
8
9
4
5
6
Legends
Circuit Diagrams
6
6
1
2
3
Terminal Identification
M
2PST
2 4
1 3
6
N
2PDT
P
1PDT
2
6
3
H4
1PDT
4
2
3
6
6
Q7
2 circuit
B
A
C
C
NC NO
H
G
NC
NO
6
6
6
V11-T6-18
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Dimensions
6
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.400
(35.56)
0.312
(7.92)
0.190
(4.83)
0.890
(22.61)
0.310
(7.87)
0.705 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.740
(18.80)
2
C
NO
NO
0.900
(22.86)
0.400
(10.16)
1.200
(30.48)
0.990
(25.15)
B
0.400
(11.18)
1.133
(28.78)
0.625 ± 0.010
(15.88 ± 0.254)
0.400
(10.16)
1.140 + 0.005
(28.96 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.600 0.800
(15.24) (20.32)
LEGEND
LEGEND
0.625 + 0.010
(15.88 + 0.254/
– 0.000)
0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.
0.685
(17.40)
Typ.
1.400
(35.56)
0.312
(7.92)
6
0.500
(12.70)
Typ.
6
6
0.125
(3.18)
0.190
(4.83)
NC
NC
C
NO
0.800
(20.32)
Typ.
0.500
(12.70)
LEGEND
0.550
(13.97)
1.190
(30.23)
0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.600
(15.24)
Typ.
6
0.730
(18.54)
0.960
(24.38)
0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
C
NO
6
0.120
(3.05)
0.970
(24.64)
0.400
(10.16)
6
6
770 Series
220 Series
6
6
LEGEND
C A
6
A = 0.270 (6.86)
B = 0.330 (8.38)
C = 0.440 (11.18)
NC
NC
0.740
(18.80)
Typ.
6
580 Series
206 Series
6
2.200
(55.88)
F-S = 0.360 (9.14)
G = 0.270 (6.86)
H = 0.120 (3.05)
1.110 ± 0.005
(28.19 ± 0.127)
6
6
Panel thickness
0.030 (0.762) to
0.250 (6.35)
6
0.875 ± 0.005
(22.23 ± 0.127)
6
6
0.940
(23.88)
0.400
(10.16)
0.740
(18.80)
Typ.
NC
0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.800
(20.32)
Typ.
NC
C
C
NO
NO
0.500
(12.70)
LED
0.312
(7.92)
6
810 Series
231 Series
1.400
(35.56)
0.100
(2.54)
0.190
(4.83)
0.600
(15.24)
Typ.
1.070
(27.18)
0.910
(23.11)
C
L
0.300
(7.62)
6
1.000
(25.40)
6
0.310
(7.87)
6
0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.
C
L
6
LEGEND
0.750
(19.05)
0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.140
(3.56)
1.170
(29.72)
A = 0.330 (8.38)
B = 0.440 (11.18)
0.875 ± 0.005
(22.23 ± 0.127)
1.110 ± 0.005
(28.19 ± 0.127)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T6-19
6.2
6
6
6
6
6
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
820 Series
0.160
(4.06)
860 Series
0.940
(23.88)
Typ.
0.160 (4.06)
0.660
(16.76)
6
6
Pushbuttons
0.025
(0.64)
0.310
(7.87)
A = 0.330 (8.38)
B = 0.440 (11.18)
0.910
(23.11)
6
6
0.515
(13.08)
LEGEND
0.280 (7.11)
0.840
(21.34)
0.250
(6.35)
1.110 (28.19)
0.090
(2.29)
0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.
0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.
0.875 + 0.005
(22.23 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
LEGEND
0.280
(7.11)
0.750
(19.05)
Typ.
0.875 + 0.005
(22.23 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.850
(21.59)
Typ.
0.620
(15.75)
Typ.
0.755 ± 0.005
(19.18 ± 0.127)
0.310
(7.87)
0.755 ± 0.005
(19.18 ± 0.127)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-20
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
A = 0.240 (6.10)
B = 0.350 (8.89)
C = 0.140 (3.56)
1.000
(2.54)
Definitions
7.1
Switch Terminology
7
Glossary of Terms
Term
7
Definition
One Pole (1P)—Single Pole (SP)
A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of an electrical circuit.
Two Pole (2P)—Double Pole (DP)
A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in both conductors of the same circuit.
Two Circuit (2 CIR.)
A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of two independent circuits.
Single Throw (ST)
A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at only one of the extreme positions of its actuator.
Double Throw (DT)
A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at both extreme positions of its actuator.
Normally Open (NO)
A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are open when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position.
Normally Closed (NC)
A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are closed when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position.
Actuator
A lever, pushbutton, slide, trigger or other means to which an external force is applied to operate a switch mechanism.
Alternate Action (Double Action Push)
Push to make, then push to break a circuit.
7
Break-Before-Make
A non-shorting switch mechanism that opens or breaks a connection in a conductor before closing or making a connection in another
conductor.
7
Make-Before-Break
A shorting switch mechanism that closes or makes a connection in a conductor before opening or breaking a previous connection in
another conductor.
7
Life Expectancy
The useful life cycle performance of a switch mechanism to open or close, make or break, an electrical circuit, based on statistical
probability.
7
Operating Force
The force that must be applied to the actuator to move it from the free position to the operating position.
Operate Position
The position of the actuator at which the circuit transfers.
7
Release Force
In a momentary type switch, the value to which the force on the actuator must be reduced to allow the contacts to return to the normal
or rest position.
7
Momentary Action Switches
Momentary action switches turn a process ON and OFF when force is applied and then removed. The applied force can make the circuit change state
and the removed force returns circuit to its original state.
7
Maintained Action Switches
A type of device in which the switch or button physically keeps the circuit in the actuated position.
Half-Throw Circuit
A circuit where the actuator has only two positions (center and one extreme position) with a positive stop that prevents actuator movement to the
opposite extreme position.
7
7
7
7
7
7
Approval Marks 1
Mark
EN
EC
7
7
Country/Region
Definition
U.S.A.
UL® Recognized
Listing Number: Switches—E24354 or File E1148, WOYR2 1609; Indicator—E70176, E2702
Canada
UL Recognized
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Numbers: E2702, E180275, E43960 and E147754þ
U.S.A. and Canada
UL Recognized
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections)
Canada
CSA®—Canadian Standards Associations (Certified)
Listing Number: LR10538 or 45995, 9002 Class 6241
U.S.A.
UL Listed
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number:þE180275
7
Europe
ENEC: European Norms Electrical Certification; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections)
7
—
Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2001/65/EU
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Note
1 See specific product for specifications for applicable approvals.
7
7
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T7-1
7.2
7
7
Index
11-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33
2600_–2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48
13-5496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-7
2600H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-51
13-8171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-7
28-3154_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-14
13-8173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6, V11-T3-7
28-3155_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-14
1500_–1507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-44
28-3156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-15
7
1500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-45
28-3157_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-15
7
15-1043_–15-1047_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-3158_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-14
15-1048-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31, V11-T4-33
28-3425_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-65
15-1049_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33
28-3426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76
15-124F_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5148_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-65
15-1525_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5415_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-62
7
15-189-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5555_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-72
15-192_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5558 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76
7
15-2523_–15-2528_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5637-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76
7
15-2534-14_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5863_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-13
15-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5901_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-9
15-966-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5909_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-9
15-994-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
28-5940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76
7
7
7
7
7
1600_–1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48
29-761-5_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-32
7
1600H_–1620H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-51
2CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-15
1609_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-49, V11-T2-53
2N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-14
7
1620HX_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-51
30-2899-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-34
7
16-4183_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-32
30-5632-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-34
16-4778_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-32
32-2245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-38
17-19263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77
32-341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33
17-19264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77
3CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-15
17-19544-2_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77
3N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-14
7
17-21159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77
53-3318_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77
17-21160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77
53-3338_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-16
7
17-21543 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77
53-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9
7
17-22145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40
580K_–581K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-10
17-22145_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40
580P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
17-22146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40
586L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-10
17-22152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40
61-40_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9
17-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9
6CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-15
7
200B_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-16
6N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-14
206K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9
7071K_–7073K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-9
7
206P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
7300K_–7317K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-6
208L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9
7500K_–7510K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12, V11-T4-15
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
220K_–221K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9
7530K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13
220P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
7546K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12
224L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9
7555K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12
231K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9
7560K_–7569K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13, V11-T4-15
7
231P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
7570K_–7571K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13, V11-T4-15
234L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9
7576K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12
7
2500_–2507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-44
7580K_–7587K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12
7
2500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-45
7590K_–7597K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13
25-13936_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40
7630K_–7632K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13
V11-T7-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
Index
7.2
7660K_–7668K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4
8423K_–8424K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3
7670K_–7674K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4
8434K_–8435K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-4
7690K_–7695K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-14
8440K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3
7700K_–7705K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-14
8444K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-4
770K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-11
8448K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-4
770P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
845L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12
775L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-11
849P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
7803K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13
860K_–861K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12
7804K_–7805K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-14
8800K_ -8860K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4
7810K_–7813K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-28
8857K_–8859K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-5
7818K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-2
8928K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6, V11-T4-20
7835K_–7836K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3
8980K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-4
7842K_–7846K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6
B1600_–B1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-50
7933K_–7935K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-14
B2600_–B2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-50
7990K_–7992K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-28
DP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2
8004K_–8005K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-66
DS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2
8006K _–8007K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-63
E30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-5
8055K_–8057K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-56
E32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-8
8064K_–8065K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-73
E321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9
810K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12
E324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9
810P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
E33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-12
8130K_–8138K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-55
eSM_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-5, V11-T1-8, V11-T1-9, V11-T1-11
8140K_–8148K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-55
eVu_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-15
8150K_–8155K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-55
MS25068_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4
815L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12
MS25098_–MS25100_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-3
8166K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-9
MS25125_–MS25127_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-5
8179K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-42
MS25201_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4
820K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12
MS35058_–MS35059_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4
820P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
NGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-8–V11-T2-33
825L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12
NGR Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-14, V11-T2-15
8261K_–8262K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-3
NGR Rocker Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-11
8280K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20
NGR Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-10
8283K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6
P1600_–P1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48
8290K_–8295K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20
P2600_–P2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48
8370K_–8373K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6
RW_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-4
8370K_–8375K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20
SVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-32–V11-T2-40
8381K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20
SW1RY_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33
8391K_–8396K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20
WP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2
8406K_–8411K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3
WS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2
8418K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3
XTD_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-25
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
V11-T7-3